Home

Load Cell Input Module User`s Manual

1. NO Perform two point span calibration Activate two point calibration values Set Two point setting Un G40 to Write 1 Turn on and then off Two point setting request Y7 Two point span calibration lt gt Page 256 Appendix 4 2 Two point calibration mode switching Turn off Two point calibration mode switch request YA Check if Two point calibration mode status flag XA is turned off Check if Module ready X0 is turned on Check if RUN LED is lit Two point calibration end 4 When executing the two point span calibration set the weight of the actual load standard weight to be placed in advance 2 When the calibration site of the weighing machine differs from the installation site configure the setting again at the installation site For details on the gravitational acceleration correction function refer to the following e Gravitational Acceleration Correction Function gt Page 56 Section 4 7 3 Perform user setting when any fine adjustment is necessary after the backup of the set data in the following buffer memory areas are reflected or after the automatic setting was performed once e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 ainpsoojd pue Huas y xipuaddy pasn si ue1Bo1
2. Reset the value of Number of load cells in connection Un G53 within the range of 1 to 4 Reset the value of Tare zero offset Un G54 to O or 1 Reset the value of Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 within the range of 1 to 99999 Reset the values of Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 Number of load cells in connection Un G53 and Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Reset the value of Minimum division Un G58 within the range of 0 to 5 Reset the value of Decimal point position Un G59 within the range of 0 to 4 Reset the value of Unit Un G60 within the range of 0 to 2 Reset the value of Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 within the range of 1 to 99999 Reset the values of Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 and Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 ISI OPO JOU LLL Reset the value of Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 within the range of 97000 to 99999 Reset the value of Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 within the range of 97000 to 99999 Reset the value of Digital output zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 within the range of 65536 to 65535 Reset the value of Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 within the range of 65536 to 65535 Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to Automatic setting 0 to perform two point calibration or reset t
3. 2 Open the network parameter setting window and set the following DO Project window gt Parameter gt Network parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET 44 Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration Motte Mole 2 Mode O A IN AA AA A A VEN 5 PP O A IN A A EAN a a a Refresh Parameters Settings Necessary Setting Mo Setting Already Set Set if it is needed Wo Setting Already Set Start I O No Valid Module During Other Station Access fi Please input 16 point uniti HEX to stark IO Mo in which module is mounted Acknowledge Y Assignment Routing Parameters Assignment Image Check End Cancel mee Print Window Print Window enn A RS ope poe aS LUET lir 1H transmission Parameters Ki 176 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 3 Open the network range assignment window and set the following Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET E gt Network Range 4ssignment button 4 Network Parameter Assignment the MNET 10 H Remote Station Network Range Module No 1 Setup common parameters and 1 0 assignments Assignment Method lora T 200 10ms pO Points Start US Me Parameter Name i Total sl le Start End E Switch Screens Bw Setting M Station gt RA Station M Station A Station M Station gt RA Station M Station R Station Station Mo Vit PA PE
4. Ex When Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 is set to Auto restoration 1 and Warning output setting Un G20 b8 is set to Input signal error detection disable 1 Exceeded conversion Gross weight output value Exceeded conversi n clear Conversion range Weighing capacity over Weighing capacity over clear Maximum weighing capacity set value 10 divisions input signal error clear Input signal error detection setting Maximum weighing capacity setting eran Bunyes uo eJ0 59 D1 EWOINE JOAO UOISJBAUOD JO SNJe s ay Ag 101149 euBis indu uodn uoneJlado 121 p Conversion enable disable setting Un GO TX Conversion enable 0 Error flag XF Conversion completion flag Un G113 Conversion completed 1 uonoun4 uonoa 2q 101143 euBbis indu Z1 p Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b3 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b2 Input signal error detection signal XC Error clear request Y F 97 98 Point O Conversion over 1 or errors error code 99 may be caused by a number of factors including disconnection of load cell connection cables wrong wiring wrong parameter settings and module failures O When the load cell connection cable is disconnected the input will be indefinite due to high impedance and it can exceed the conversion range CHAPTER 4
5. I l O l I 0 0 pa e Load cell output mV V 0 0 0 4 08 i 1 2 16 20 309 A D conversion value 0000001 E i 7FFFFFH 10 25 0 75 1 0 mVA mV Y mV V a Par ro Q Zero offset output value 1 0 mV V To 1 0mV V a 0 0 0 2 10 Input value after zero offset mV V ee To 16 0mV V Oe Qmm AD converter gain 8 times S 2 309 q o lt lt XA E a Input value after multiplication mV V 0 25x8 Gross weight output value x 1071 k A 3000 g p kg gt Do not load anymore 4 Even if Load cell rated output Un G52 is changed from 1 2mV V to 2 0mV V as it is still within the range of 1mV V to 2mvV V the instrumentation amplifier gain of O to 2 0mV V will be applied 2 As the fixed tare weight corresponds to 1 0mV V it is offset by 1 0mV V by the tare zero offset output value 3 Although the load cell can be loaded up to the level of 2 0mV V output corresponding to 16 0mV V after amplification a conversion over error may result since the conversion range of the Q61LD is limited to 2 309mV V CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 4 Conversion Enable Disable Function This function is used for the setting to enable or disable the conversion 1 Setting method Set Conversion enable disable to O Enable Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name seen Conversion enable disable 1 Disable EJ Averaging processing method O Enable setting 1 Disable
6. E Error A Minor Error Module Changing o Major Error A Moderate Error O Assignment Error e Assignment Incorrec t ox EP Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device C Device Name Buffer Memory Module Start 0000 y HEX 50 y Dec y Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Address Address Modify Value Device Label Buffer Memory Device Label Y7 Data Type Bit Switch ONJOFF pa Range Execution Result lt Execution Result Dievice Label Data Type Eit Eit Word Signed Wiord Signed Bit Reflect to Input Column Delete C Continued to the next page 220 Click the button to close the System Monitor window Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor window XW online gt Monitor gt gt Device Buffer Memory Batch 5 Display and select the buffer memory data of which content has been recorded beforehand and click the button 6 Turnon Two point calibration mode switch request YA to switch to the two point calibration mode 7 Set the buffer memory data with the settings that have been recorded beforehand 8 Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to User setting 1 and Two point setting Un G40 to Write 1 9 Turnon Two point setting request Y7 10 After checking that Two point setting completion flag X7 i
7. Number of load cells in connection Un G53 Tare zero offset Un G54 Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 Decimal point position Un G59 Two point setting Set Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 Unit Un G60 Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 2 Activate two point setting value Set Two point setting Un G40 to Write 1 Turn on and then off Two point setting request Y7 To the next page 252 APPENDICES Two point calibration has been NO performed once Perform two point calibration automatically seting beforehand Usersetting setting beforehand YES User setting Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to Automatic setting User setting 1 3 Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 Configure two point calibration setting beforehand to Automatic setting 0 Default Setting two points calibration values Set the following two point calibration values Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 A D converter gain setting Un G81 Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 Two point Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 calibration has been Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 performed once Two point zero calibration L Page 254 Appendix 4 1
8. Please confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed button Execute 2 Click the button to suspend the MELSOFT Application Online Module Change mode Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not canceled i The online module change is stopped Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again Continued to the next page ajgepeneun si wa s s Jaeyjouy usyan wepold aoUaNbasS e Aq Jas Je SUB JoWeIeY YAUM QOL 219 Continued y System Monitor Monitor Status Connection Channel List Stop Mentor Mode C System Monitor Online Module Change Serial Port NET 10 H Remote Module Connection R5 232C System Image Main Base E Main Base I O Adr 0000 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0070 Slot pa a Operation to Selected Module Main Base Intelli Module Information List Main Base Main Base Information List Base Module Base Model Name Power Base Slots Installed Status Base Series Model Name H Parameter Supply Type Modules Slot Type MainBase Exist Q 8 1 Power CPU Q QI72LP25 25 IJO Network No Master Point Address Station No PLC Extension Basel Extension Base2 O Extension Base3 0 1 Empty Extension Base4 Empty Extension Base5 E Empty Extension Base6 j Empty Extension Base7 Empty Empty Empty
9. The module is normally operating The operation of the module has stopped The RUN LED turns off Conversion disabled using GX Works2 GX Works2 to enable t he module to be removed Remove the selected module 3 Mount a new module Mount a new module The X Y refresh restarts and the module starts up The RUN LED turns on Default operation After mounting the module ae READY X0 stays x x x Click button on Works2 om When there are initial setting parameters the module starts to operate based on the initial setting parameters at this point Check the operation before the control starts 4 Check the operation Click the _ tacs button on GX Works2 to turn off the online mode On Device test on GX Works2 test the operation of the module The module operates based on the test operation Module READY X0 turns on y Operation check is completed abBueyo anpo yy auuo Bulinp vonelado 0L 5 Restart the control Restart the online module change using GX Works2 Click the he module operates based on the initial setting sequence program started when Module READY X0 is started button to restart the control 4 Includes access to the intelligent function module device UDO GD 2 In the absence of the operation marked 2 the intelligent function module performs the operation previous to the marked one 3 When another system is not a
10. Description Setting range Moving average 2 to 255 counts a Enabling the settings Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the settings b Default The default count is 10 Point O lfa value outside the setting range is written an error occurs and the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence O When Sampling processing 0p is set for Averaging processing method setting Un G1 any value written to Moving average setting Un G3 is ignored O In two point zero calibration mode the setting range is limited for each averaging processing method For details on the limitation of the setting range refer to the following e Two point zero calibration lt gt Page 254 Appendix 4 1 1 127 sjiejoq eyjeg Bumes 79 5 Stable status range setting Un G4 Stable status time setting Un G5 Configure the setting for detecting that Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 are stable Stable status ranges are set for Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 The setting range is as follows Description Setting range Stable status range setting Un G4 O to 100 x Minimum division Un G58 Stable status time setting Un G5 O to 100 x 100ms Setting 0 to either of the settings disables the stable status function Stable status time setti
11. O Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant chapter in this manual After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCTO 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault o
12. Warning output function Set about the warning of conversion Warning output setting warning output Warning output setting finput signal error detection Input signal error detection setting Zero point range setting Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Gross weight lower upper limit value setting 0 Input signal error detection enable 5 0 10 0 100 50 Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Gross weight upper upper limit value setting This area is used to set whether the warning upper lower limit alarm will be output or stopped on a channel basis CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING b Auto refresh setting Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module Name gt Auto_Refresh 0000 061LD Auto_Refresh SEE Display Filter Display All se Is Item Common section AA A E E E AAE AA EA A A sae nnd Transfer to CPU The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device Gross weight output value D4 Digital output value Gross weight output maximum value Gross weight output minimum value Digital output maximum value Digital output minimum value Conversion completion flag Input signal error detection flag D34 Warning output Flag D35 Two point calibration completion flag Default value write completion flag Usable later than product information 1201 10000000000 C Zero point adjustment completion Flag Latest error code
13. X7 Y7 x9 Y9 U0IG43 0U0NG43 1U0IG148 0 RR eS SS eS a nai Simultaneous request interlock M40 XO X13 LM SET M50 Two point calibration start flag XOA X14 Hth RST M50 M50 YOA Two point calibration mode switch request ON XOA agoa l SET MO Operating condition setting command MO XOF M40 UO L MOV HO GO Conversion enable SET Y9 Operating condition setting request ON RST MO Operating condition setting command XOA Y9 x9 e H i y A s e Y9 Operating condition setting request OFF X15 XO XOA XOF M40 UN l p SSeS Ss G80 Instrumentation amplifier gain setting UN G81 A D converter gain setting VO l G82 Weighing platform weight zero offset output value UO a G84 Two point zero calibration value UO a G86 Two point span calibration value UN l l l G40 Two point setting Write UN EON G41 Two point calibration method setting User setting Y7 Two point setting request ON XO XOA Y7 X7 Ly RST Y7 Two point setting request OFF UN MOV HO G40 Two point setting Read UN l ee MOV HO G41 Two point calibration method setting Automatic setting XOF VO BCD G1800 K4Y20 J Output an error code in BCD XOF BCD KO K4Y20 Error code output OFF xoc X19 YOF Error clear request ON XOF END Point After the shift to the two point calibration mode do not perform the following Otherwise the data in non volatile memory FeRAM becomes abnormal and the Q61LD may not run correctly e Power
14. installation site Installation Site Setting When correcting the two point calibration setting values please set the scale correction setting Scale Correction Setting Close y Continued to the next page uonouny UOH euqijeD JUIOd OM gp peo jenjoe ue moy im pauojled s uonesqijeo UBUMA y 8 p 19 Continued y 3 Setthe Rated Output value The setting range of the rated output is 0 3 to 3 0 Scale Initial Setting 0000 061LD 1 Set a condition to execute two point zero span calibration Current Setting Value of Q61LD Load cell Item Setting Value Rated Capacity 10000 Rated Output 0 5 Number of load cells in connection 1 Scale Setting y 4 Set Zero Offset to Not Used Scale Setting Item Setting Value Leave other parameters unchanged from the default Zero Offset Used y Maximum Weighing Capacity Setting values _ Minimum Division Not Used Decimal Point Position 0 Unit Kg Standard Weight Setting 10000 Installation site Installation Site y 5 With nothing placed on the weighing machine 0kg except for the fixed tare click the Before executing the following processes be sure to check the Current Setting Value of Q61LD button 2 Execute two point zero calibration Current Two Point Calibration alue i tem Setting Value r a 2 0mV lt Load cell rated Instrumentation Ampli
15. 3 Outside the zero point range available only in the normal mode This notification will be provided when it is necessary to perform a corrective action such as to remove any accretion on the scale under the following condition e When the zero offset is excessive and zero set operation is required a Occurrence of outside the zero point range e When zero set operation is performed while the current zero offset is exceeding Zero point range setting Un G22 value as referenced from the zero point at the time of the previous two point calibration Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b0 will be set to Outside the zero point range 1 e When the following condition is satisfied it will be turned on by the resolution unit of Minimum division Un G58 or less which is the resolution of Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 4 Minimum division Un G58 is set in the Scale Initial Setting window Gross weight output value Maximum weighing Zero point Un G100 Un G101 capacity setting range setting o e Zero point adjustment will not be preformed and the conversion of Gross weight output value Un G100 UniG101 will continue For details on the zero set reset function refer to Zero set reset function 2_ gt Page 89 Section 4 11 b Clearing the outside the zero point range After returning Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 to a normal value turn on and off Error clear request YF When
16. Data structure is the same as History 1 History 13 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 14 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 15 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 16 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 17 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 18 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY Default J setting Read Write 2 a registration command 123 si7 Aowa yng 19 Address Hex H 7624 7664 7674 76By 76Cy 7704 7714 7754 7764 77Ay 77By 77Fy 7804 784p 7854 7894 78Ay 78Ey 78Fy 7934 7944 7984 7994 79D4 79Ey 7A24 7A3y A 124 1890 1894 1895 1899 1900 1904 1905 1909 1910 1914 1915 1919 1920 1924 1925 1929 1930 1934 1935 1939 1940 1944 1945 1949 1950 1954 1955 1959 Data type PO a Description History 19 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 20 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 21 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 22 Error code Error occurrence tim
17. I i I Warning output signal X8 p Executed in a sequence program a gt CExecuted by the Q61LD sjiejaq euBbis O I Z S 113 114 7 Operating condition setting completion flag X9 Operating condition setting request Y9 e When Module ready X0 turns on Operating condition setting completion flag X9 will turn on Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the following settings e Conversion enable disable setting Un GO e Averaging processing method setting Un G1 e Count average setting Un G2 e Moving average setting Un G3 e Stable status range setting Un G4 e Stable status time setting Un G5 e Zero tracking range setting Un G6 e Zero tracking time setting Un G7 e Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 e Warning output setting Un G20 e Input signal error detection setting Un G21 e Zero point range setting Un G22 e Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit value setting H Un G31 When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on Operating condition setting completion flag X9 will turn off When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned off Operating condition setting completion flag X9 will turn on Use Operating condition setting completion flag X9 as an interlock to turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 Module ready X0
18. Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting cael _ 2 Click the Two Point Calibration Setting 0000 Q61LD x button Set two point calibration setting When you use the scale for the first time or scale installation site has been changed please specify the scale initial setting Without the Scale Initial Setting the following settings cannot work appropriately When scale installation site was changed from the site where the two point calibration was performed gravitational acceleration needs to be corrected Please set the installation site Installation Site Setting When correcting the two point calibration setting values please set the scale correction setting Scale Correction Setting y Continued to the next page 64 Continued y Scale Initial Setting 0000 061LD 1 Set a condition to execute two point zero span calibration Current Setting Value of Q61LD CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 3 Enter appropriate values in the initial setting items and click the button Load cell Item Setting Value Rated Capacity 10000 Rated Output 3 0mv Y Number of load cells in connection 1 Scale Setting Item Setting Value Zero Offset Used Maximum Weighing Capacity Setting 10000 Minimum Division 1 Decimal Point Position xD 1 Unit kg Standard Weight Setting 10000 Installation Site Item Setting Value Installation Site Gravitational Acceleration 9 8067G Explanation Set amount of weigh
19. Un GO Error flag XF Conversion completion flag Un G113 Conversion 4A completed 1 Input signal error detection flag l Un G114 b3 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b2 7m Input signal error detection signal XC Error clear request YF 96 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 2 When Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 is set to Auto restoration 1 When Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 is set to Auto restoration 1 the conversion process continues even after Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b3 is set to Conversion over 1 At this time Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 are fixed to the values at the time of conversion over occurrence Once the signal level returns to within the conversion range the Conversion over 1 status of Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b3 will automatically be cleared Although the Weighing capacity over 1 status of Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b1 will not automatically be restored by setting Warning output setting Un G20 b8 to Input signal error detection disable 1 the Input signal error 1 status of Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b2 will not be generated and thus it returns to the normal status once Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 returns to normal
20. count average setting O Sampling Processing see Moving average setting Count Average H Stable status range setting Moving Average E apne he 5 Combination Use of Count 4verage and Moving CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 2 Count average processing The sampling processing is executed for a predefined number of times and the resulting data is averaged after excluding the maximum and minimum values Then the averaged values are stored into the buffer memory The processing time is calculated as follows Processing time Number of sampling x 10 ms a Setting method 1 Set Averaging processing method setting to 2 Count Average Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Parameter Averaging processing method setting Count Average see Count average setting en Moving average setting see Stable status range setting A ala Me Le Count average 3 Mowing Average 5 Combination Use of Count Average and Mowing 2 Set the value number of times for Count average setting Averaging processing method 5 Combination Use of Count Average and Moving Average setting b cecccccusccvccovscocsecsececesovsesevencesecsccsvousecocccousouseccosconscoucevecsveesesecoucusccccccoscosccousecseucouececcouccecrceusersvszecn Count average setting LN O Moving average setting 10 Times Item Setting value Count average setting 4 to 255 When Count average setting is set to 5 times 5
21. gravitational acceleration needs to be corrected Please set the installation site When correcting the two point calibration setting values please set the scale correction setting Scale Correction Setting Close 3 Set the value for Installation Site Gravitational Acceleration and click the button The To correct the errors of weight caused by e CMe erele ke setting range of gravitational acceleration is 9 7000 set gravitational acceleration at installation site to 9 9999 Explanation Set gravitational acceleration at installation site 3 7000 to 9 9999 G i 4 The setting for the installation site is complete MELSOFT Series GX Works s J Installation site setting completed 59 UONOUN U00 UONEJa a99 Y JEUONEWAGID py 4 8 60 Two point Calibration Function This function performs necessary adjustments to work with the load cell to use the Q61LD as a weighing machine For example by placing an actual load weight of 250kg on the scale the calibration work accurately adjusts Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 to 250 00kg This adjustment is referred to as two point calibration 4 8 1 Precautions for two point calibration Precautions for performing two point calibration are as follows Perform two point calibration in the actual weighing machine configuration Perform two point zero calibration before performing two point span calibration Before perfor
22. i Device Name AUKEREN Buffer Memory Module Start HES ddress Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format er Dt ple pica also dlelsaslouol MO joooooooo0oo00o000 fo 226 2 3 4 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Storage area for latest error code and error occurrence time If an error occurs when the data is written to or read from the CPU module the Q61LD writes the corresponding error code to the buffer memory Latest error code Error code to be stored decimal Un G1790 Un G1791 to Un G1794 1 2 99 100 161 to 163 Un G190 Un G191 to Un G194 Other than 1 2 99 100 161 to 163 Error history storage Up to last 40 errors are stored in Error history Un G1800 to Un G1999 Point The data of error occurrence time is stored on the basis of the CPU module time information If the error occurrence time is wrong check the time setting of the CPU module When using the Q61LD in the MELSECNET H remote I O network the time information is transferred as shown below Therefore the sequence of power supply for the system and the error occurrence timing may result in storing wrong information at the time of error occurrence e CPU module gt MELSECNET H master module gt MELSECNET H remote module gt Q61LD Error code list Errors are classified into two levels moderate module error and minor module warning When a moderate error occurs convers
23. 3000 300 0kg 1 As Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 is 300 0kg and Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 is 300 0kg x 4 1200 0kg the maximum weighing capacity corresponds to 25 of Load cell rated output Un G52 2 As Load cell rated output Un G52 is 1 2mV V Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 is set to a value suitable to the range of 0 to 2mV V Accordingly 60 1 2 2 0 0 6 of the conversion range available with the Q61LD is used 3 From the relationship of 25 x 60 15 the range to be used for weighing corresponds to 60 of the capacity of the Q61LD when four load cells are used in parallel x 4 with the optimum A D converter gain If it is multiplied by 8 it exceeds 100 of the capacity and conversion over error will be produced within the weighing range 300kg 1200kg maximum weighed amount rated load of the load cell 1 2mV V om rated output of the load cell Convertible range by the Q61LD when the load cell rated output is 1 1mV V to 2 0mV V 100 Percentage calculated with 1 and 2 above Since the used range is 15 of the convertible range by the Q61LD when the gain is 2 output range is 30 of the convertible range therefore the gain is too small when the gain is 4 output range is 60 of the convertible range therefore the gain is appropriate when the gain is 8 output range exceeds the convertible range therefore the gain is too large 9
24. APPENDICES 240 Appendix 1 Dedicated Instructions 0 0 0 cc eee eet eee teens 240 Appendix 1 1 GiPVOGLOAD as NS AREA AAN 242 Appendix 1 2 S PLOESTO Roatan ra aaa aaa ile dada 246 Appendix 2 Additions and Changes of Functions by Upgrade o o ooo ooooooo 250 Appendix 3 When GX Developer is UsSed o o oo oooo eee eens 251 Appendix 4 Two point Calibration when a Sequence Program is Used 252 Appendix 4 1 Setting and procedure 252 Appendix 4 2 Program example for two point calibration 00000 ee eee 257 Appendix 4 3 When calibration is performed without an actual load 263 Appendix 5 Online Module Change When GX Developer is Used 268 Appendix 5 1 Precautions for online module Change o oooooooooo oo 268 Appendix 5 2 Execution condition of online module Change o oooo oo o 269 Appendix 5 3 Operation during online module Change oooooooooo ooo 270 Appendix 5 4 Procedures of online module Change o ooo ooooooooooo o 2 1 Appendix 5 5 When another system is available ooooooooooo o 212 Appendix 5 6 When another system is not available o o ooooooooo 278 Appendix 6 External Dimensions 285 INDEX 286 RE VISION S iii da dd io Ai 288 WARRANTS NEA 289 10 7 When Parameters are Set by the Configuration Function When Another System is Unavailable is
25. Do not apply a voltage of 2 5V or lower or 2 5V or higher It can cause a failure of the Q61LD 28 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 Characteristics of gross weight output value The gross weight output values become available after two point calibration is performed Ex The characteristics are shown for the following conditions 1 Two point calibration value e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 2500 e Load cell rated output Un G52 30 3 0mV V e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 4 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 6000 2 Analog input voltages for two point calibration e ZERO point 3mV e SPAN point 12mV 3 Load cell output when it is loaded with the rated capacity e Analog input Load cell rated output mV V x Load cell applied voltage output V 3 0 x 5 15mV e The load cell rated capacity is calculated as follows L r Load cell Number of load cells oad cell rated capacity x in connection rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 Un G53 2500x4 10000 The following figure shows the characteristic curve S9I SIJ9J0BJEY9 UOISIQAUOD L e suoneooads aoueuoJad p e Gross weight output value Load cell output practical range DLE HO E 4 Tare OmV 3mV 6mV 9mV 12mV 15mV Analog input value load cell output value Point O Use an analog input voltage of OmV V or higher for the ZERO point and a voltage within the analog input range within the load cell rated output
26. Error clear request YF e If an error occurs and the corresponding error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 Un G1790 Error flag XF and the ERR LED will turn on e When Error clear request YF is turned on Error flag XF turns off the value stored in Latest error code Un G190 Un G1790 is cleared and the ERR LED will turn off In addition Input signal error detection signal XC turns off and the ALM LED turns off Use Error flag XF as an interlock to turn on and off Error clear request YF Latest error code Un G190 Un G1790 rror occurrence Error flag XF Error clear request YF Executed in a sequence program ae Executed by the Q61LD sjlejaq euBbis O I Z S 117 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY This chapter describes the buffer memory of the Q61LD 6 1 Buffer Memory List This section lists the buffer memory assignment of the Q61LD Point Do not write any data to the system area and the area in the buffer memory where data writing from sequence programs is disabled Doing so may cause malfunction O Enabled x Disabled Default setting Address Data Description Read Write 2 Hex H type registration command Conversion enable disable setting 0001 y Averaging processing method setting FUE TU Count average setting Moving average setting m R W O Stable status Stable status range setting Stable status range setting Stable status time
27. Execution failed Completion status OFF Aner Execution succeeded yy indication device D 1 1scan e The accuracy after online module change is 3 times lower than the one before the change Perform a two point calibration again as necessary 4 Error In the event of the following errors the corresponding error code is stored in the completion status area s 1 Error code Case resulting in operation error 161 The G P OGSTOR instruction is executed in the offset gain setting mode 162 The G P OGSTOR instructions are executed consecutively e The G P OGSTOR instruction is executed to the model that differs from the one to which the 163 G P OGLOAD instruction was executed e The G P OGSTOR instruction is executed before the G P OGLOAD instruction 248 APPENDICES 5 Program example When M11 is turned off this program recovers the data at the target buffer memory addresses to the Q61LD mounted on the slot to which I O numbers X Y10 to X Y1F are assigned Setting control data _ _ _ _ aa _ _ _ ____JJJ2 SE MIS Restoring two point setting values and two point calibration values M13 Dedicated instruction GP OGSTOR UI D100 M30 GP OGSTOR Executing processing at abnormal completion END MoO M31 YO1S9O d 9 Z xipueddy suonon1 su pajesipag xipuaddy 249 Appendix 2 Additions and Changes of Functions by Upgrade The functions and specifications of t
28. Extension Basel SA AA A A a el Extension Base2 1 16Point Intell 16Point 0000 Extension Base3 Empty 16Point 0010 Extension Base4 Empty 16Point 0020 Extension BaseS E Empty 16Point 0030 Extension Base x Empty 16Point 0040 Extension Base Empty 16Point 0050 1Base 1Module 1 Empty 16Point 0060 Empty 16Point 0070 Online Module Change x 3 gt Operation 5 Target Module ie Change 1 0 Address poco Execution Module Name RC lLD Installation Confirmation gt Status male Module Selection Completed Module Contral Restart Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent Function module Please press next button when you are ready AO AS Cancel 6 Point Open the System Monitor window of the remote I O station O Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Select Online Module Change in Mode and double click the module to be changed online Click the button to make the module replaceable If the following error window is displayed the target buffer memory data cannot be saved for backup For details on the target buffer memory refer to Save Restoration Setting List 2 gt Page 222 Section 10 9 MELSOFT Application 1 1 The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the instal
29. Latest error code c Writing intelligent function module parameters Write the set parameters to the CPU module Then reset the CPU module or power off and on the programmable controller O Online gt Write to PLC SLL or Power off on uoleinByuosD weajs s JELWJON ul Burwwebold Z6 169 d Program example X7 Y7 x9 Y9 U0 G43 0U0 G43 1 U0 G148 0 YB a ht to X0 XOA M40 X3 X0E m A Y E TY STITT TTT S M1 x1 DMOV K5 D14 D lt D4 914 M2 M1 X1 M8 X2 D KO D4 M9 X1A XOF M1 UN lt i nx A _ Qz_ _oQ ___2SET 45 0 U0 G45 0 D36 0 UN k RST G45 0 X0C M1 X1B XOF M1 UN YY Y AS SET 651 U0IG45 1 D36 1 UN __ RST G45 1 M1 X0C D34 0 Ie D34 1 a A D34 2 HA A M5 D34 3 HA M2 X8 D35 0 tM D35 1 M7 XOF UN BCD G1800 K4Y20 XOF BCD KO K4Y20 X0C X19 YOF XOF END 170 Simultaneous request interlock Gross weight output conversion in processing Near zero point setting Near zero point Safety status output Center point detection Zero set request ON Zero set request OFF Zero reset request ON Zero reset request OFF Outside the zero point range An alarm is output even when a output setting is configured to be disabled Excess of weighing capacity An alarm is output even when Warning output setting is configured to be disabled Input signal error detection Excess of input values to be converted Gross weight upper limit Gross weight lower lim
30. Main base close the System Monitor window QO6PHCPU EE A g i i im BEER i i Im Parameter status Mode Adress 0 o o o 00 50 60 70 System monitor 1 2 3 4lslel7_ oOo ae DO Powe None None None None None None None rsu QOBPHCPU pply 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt A S Online module change Status Ol Module system error E Module error O Module warning ene O Module change gjqejiene s Wass Jayjoue u yM S S xipuaddy pasn si Jadojarnag XH u yM eBueuyo sinpoyy suuo G xipueddy y Continued to the next page 275 Device test Bit device Device Continued y E FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force word device buffer memory f Device C Buffer memon Module sta Setting value E DEC 116 bit integer Set Program Label reference program Execution history Setting condition YIA 2 6 Module start 0 Address 0H Force OFF Force ON Force OFF Force ON Close Hide history Line al Clear 10 11 Open the Device test window online gt Debug gt Device test Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Conversion enable 0 Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 Turn Two point calibration mode switch request YA from off to on so that the module switches to the two point calibration mode Monitor Gross weight output value Un G
31. Page 86 Section 4 10 Description Setting range Zero tracking range setting Un G6 O to 100 x 1 4 of Minimum division Un G58 Zero tracking time setting Un G7 O to 100 x 100ms Setting 0 to either of the settings disables the zero tracking function For Zero tracking range setting Un G6 even if 1 4 of Minimum division Un G58 does not become an integer it is internally calculated to two places of decimals and checked Zero tracking time setting Un G7 can be set in increments of 100ms Note that however it is actually processed with a shift of 10ms x Count average setting Un G2 time required for storing Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 in the buffer memory from the time setting When the following setting is configured e Zero tracking time setting Un G7 1 e Count average setting Un G2 5 10ms x Count average setting Un G2 sjiejoq ejeg Bumes 79 Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the settings a Enabling the settings b Default The default value is 0 Point O lfa value outside the setting range is written an error occurs and the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code UniG 190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence O When a ZERO point correction value exceeds Zero point range setting Un G22 automatic setting is disabled 129
32. Section 7 1 2 Page 74 Section 7 1 3 Page 74 Section 7 1 4 Page 74 Section 7 1 5 Select the model name of the connected module Set the number of points assigned to each slot Specify a start VO number for each slot Configure the switch setting of the built in I O or intelligent function modules Set the following Error Time Output Mode Page 74 Section 7 1 6 Page 75 Section 7 1 7 Setting Start X Y enables modification on the start I O numbers assigned to connected modules The section of the current page is shown PLC Operation Mode at H W Error VO Response Time hen 1000 is specified in Start X Y to the slot where a 16 point module is connected the assignment range of an input module is changed to X1000 to X100F For details refer to the following co ELSEC L CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Point Set the type of the connected module in Type Setting a different type results in SP UNIT LAY ERR asthe intelligent function module the I O points must also be the same in addition to the I O assignment setting Page 30 Section 422 Point shows notes that requires attention ED shows useful information When an intelligent module is connected 1 O assignment can be omitted by selecting connected modules from Intelligent Function Module in the Project window The mouse operation example is provided below TE MELSOFT Series GX
33. average setting Un G3 126 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 3 Count average setting Un G2 Set the count average to Count average setting Un G2 when Count average 24 or Combination use of count average and moving average 5 is set to Averaging processing method setting Un G1 The setting range is as follows Description Setting range Count average 4 to 255 counts a Enabling the settings Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the settings b Default The default count is 10 Point O Ifa value outside the setting range is written an error occurs and the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence O When Sampling processing 0p is set for Averaging processing method setting Un G1 any value written to Count average setting Un G2 is ignored O In two point zero calibration mode the setting range is limited for each averaging processing method For details on the limitation of the setting range refer to the following e Two point zero calibration gt Page 254 Appendix 4 1 1 4 Moving average setting Un G3 Set the moving average to Moving average setting Un G3 when Moving average 34 or Combination use of count average and moving average 54 is set to Averaging processing method setting Un G1 The setting range is as follows
34. for the SPAN point O The gain adjustment range of the Q61LD is 0 3mV V to 3 2mV V The load cell output voltage swing from ZERO point to SPAN point must be 0 3mV V or higher and 3 0mV V or lower Do not use the range exceeding 3 0mV V 29 3 1 2 Accuracy The accuracy of the Q61LD in terms of the analog input range load cell rated output will be maintained within the range listed in the specification even when the input characteristics are changed by changing the ZERO and SPAN point settings and or the analog input range Ex For the load cell rated output of 2mV V When the ambient temperature is 25 C the nonlinear accuracy is within 0 01 FS one digit rounded up to the nearest integer The temperature drift where ambient temperature is 0 to 55 C is as follows e Zero drift Within 0 14 14 digits rounded up to the nearest integer e Gain drift Within 0 08 9 digits rounded up to the nearest integer e Integrated accuracy Within 0 23 23 digits rounded up to the nearest integer 10000 Nonlinear accuracy fluctuation range 5000 Digital output value 0 OmV 5mV 10mV Analog input value load cell output value When the rated output of a load cell is 2mV V the zero drift gain drift and integrated accuracy are calculated by the following equations e Zero drift A Change of the ambient temperature Zero Gait 10000digit a a EY oe ay 2mV V x 5V e Gain drift A Change of the ambient te
35. o lololololololololololoLo oloTo pI Data for b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Automatic setting 1 User setting The buffer memory addresses for setting Two point calibration method setting Un G41 are as follows e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 4 Direct setting is also enabled in user setting mode a Default Automatic setting 0 is set by default Point O The following two point calibration values are stored in non volatile memory FeRAM so that the data will not be erased when the power is cut off e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 O The conditions for setting values are complicated so automatic setting is normally useful rather than user setting sjiejoq ejeg Bumes 79 14 Two point calibration setting Un G42 This setting is used to specify whether to enable or disable two point calibration b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 Data for b2 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Two point zero calibration disable 1 Two point zero calibration enable 0 Two point span calibration disable
36. the analog input voltage to the module will be five times the specified rated output value 2 The time measured from the instant when the input signal level is suddenly changed to the time when the corresponding change in the A D converted output value reaches a specified percentage of the final value to be settled upon L gt Page 26 Section 3 1 1 25 suoneooads svuewoj d p e 26 1 Response time The time measured from the instant when the input signal level is suddenly changed to the time when the corresponding change in the A D converted output value reaches a specified percentage of the final value to be settled upon When the analog input voltage to the module is suddenly changed from 0 to 15 0mV it will take about 0 4 seconds before the digital output value reaches 90 00 of the final value Response time approximately 0 4s e 10000 9000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 Digital output value 3000 2000 1000 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 1 Conversion characteristics The term conversion characteristics refers to the relationship between the input signal and output data where the analog input signal load cell output voltage from an external source to the programmable controller is converted to the digital output value or the gross weight output value e The gradient of the line from the zero value to the span value _ gt Page 28 Section 3 1 1 1
37. 0mV V it is offset by 1 0mV V by the tare zero offset output value o Although the load cell can be loaded up to the level of 2 0mV V output corresponding to 8 0mV V after amplification a conversion over error may result since the conversion range of the Q61LD is limited to 2 309mV V ZOLD UN anjea indyno e161q pue LOLON OOLS UN anjer mdino jubiem SsO 5 jo vonelado ep 41 48 c Modified case 2 When Load cell rated output Un G52 is changed from 1 2mV V to 2 0mV V and Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 is changed from 3000 to 1500 in the example conditions e The tare zero offset output value is unchanged The ZERO point is unchanged because only Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 has been changed Accordingly the tare zero offset output value is unchanged e The A D converter gain will be increased As Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 has been halved the usable range of the weighing machine corresponding to Load cell rated output Un G52 will also be halved Because of this the optimal A D converter gain is changed from 4 times to 8 times Load cell rated capacity 300kg x 4 1200 0 lt 5 0 Fo ae l Span 3 Fixed tare weighing capacity Point a 3 T500 A A l Conversion range upper limit i 2 VNA 600 0 pets s ieee cee ete eau ive ane Zero Load cell rated output oint i 300 0 j oo
38. 1 0mV V lt Rated output lt 2 0mV V 4 2 309 to 0 to 2 309 mV V 2mV V Setting value 1 7FFFFFY 0 3mV V lt Rated output lt 1 0mV V 1 154 to 0 to 1 154 mV V UONOUN JSSHO OJ9Z SB Y p Gain for converting the input of O to 2 0mV V lt Rated output lt 3 0mV V 3 464 to 0 to 3 464 mV V 3mV V Setting value 2 4 Even if the rated output level is applied from the load cell to the module about 13 4 or more margin can be provided against the upper limit of the conversion range When the rated output of the load cell is set to 2 0mV V This is the case 2 shown in the above table Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 will be set to an adequate value to handle the input range of 0 to 2mV V In this case the upper limit of the A D converter output value will be about 7266009 7FFFFFy x 2 0 2 309 about 86 6 of the conversion range will be used Note that conversion over error will be presented when the A D converter output value reaches the lower limit 800000 or upper limit 7FFFFF 2 For the conversion range upon using the fixed tare refer to the operation of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 lt Page 39 Section 4 3 53 b A D converter gain setting Un G81 Select the setting value from 1 0p 2 14 4 24 8 34 16 44 and 32 5p times in such a way that the following equation is satisfied Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 1 gt x AD co
39. 10000 Rated Output 3 0m Number of load cells in connection 1 Scale Setting Item Setting Value a fa Zero Offset Not Used Maximum Weighing Capacity Setting 10000 Minimum Division 1 Decimal Point Position jo Load cell Unit kg v y Standard Weight Setting 10000 Instaftetitin site Installation Site Item Setting value Installation Site Gravitational Acceleration 9 80676 Explanation Set rated output of load cell in units of 0 1m Zv O 3m to 3 0m ZV 11 Click the i button MELSOFT Series GX Works Do vou want to continue No A Condition change will be written to the module 12 Reflection of the conditions have been completed MELSOFT Series GX Works 1 Condition reflection completed uoioun y uoneqijen juIod om gp Point O Perform two point calibration in the actual weighing machine configuration O As two point span calibration has not been done automatic setting of Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 UniG67 will not be made Leave the values of Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 and Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 unchanged from their default values O Satisfy the following conditions peo jenjoe ue noy im paulojlad si uonesJqieo UBUA p 8 p Maximum weighing x Rated output mV V x AID en Capacity setting gain setting Rated capacities x Connection numbers x Instrumentation ampli
40. 16 bit 16 bit binary data or the start number of word device BIN 32 bit 32 bit binary data or the start number of double word device BCD 4 digit Four digit binary coded decimal data BCD 8 digit Eight digit binary coded decimal data Real number Floating point data Character string Character string data Device name Device name data 13 TERMS Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms Term Q61LD QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU Factory default setting GX Works2 GX Developer Buffer memory Load cell Remote sensing method Ratiometric method Rated capacity A D conversion output value Digital output value Gross weight output value Connection box Summing box Gain drift Zero drift The product package contains the following Model Q61LD 14 Description The abbreviation for the Q61LD load cell input module Another term for the MELSEC Q series CPU module A generic term for the QO2PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU A generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU A generic term for analog input ranges of 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 1 to 5V 10 to 10V 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers The memory of an intelligent function module used to store data such as setting values and monitored values for communication with a CPU module A sensor that converts a load such as force weight and torque into
41. 2 Click on the item to be set and enter the target device to be automatically refreshed 5 0000 Q061LD Auto_Refresh l Display Filter Display All z E C OnNnon section E Transfer to CPU The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device oo GE weight output value Digital output value Gross Weight output maximum value Gross weight output minimum value Digital output maximum value Digital output minimum value Conversion completion Flag Input signal error detection Flag Warning output Flag Two point calibration completion Flag Default value write completion FlagiLsable later than product information 120110000000000 7 Zero point adjustment completion Flag Latest error code Latest error code 9 4 Two point Calibration For the two point calibration setting refer to the following e Setting method gt Page 61 Section 4 8 2 8 5 Default Setting Registration For the default setting registration refer to the following e Default Setting Registration Function lt gt Page 107 Section 4 18 162 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes programming for the Q61LD When applying the program examples introduced in this chapter to an actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems 163 9 1 164 Programming Procedure Create a program in which a gross weight outpu
42. 32 bit signed binary a Default The default value is 10000 Point O Satisfy the following conditions e Seta value within the setting range Standard Maximum weighing Load cell Number of load cells weight setting lt Capacity setting lt rated capacity x in connection Un G62 Un G63 Un G56 Un G57 Un G50 Un G51 Un G53 Capacity setting A D converter gain setting Unese Unies7 eC puput MWN X Un G81 7 Rated capacities a Connection numbers Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G50 Un G51 Un G53 Un G80 For A D converter gain setting Un G81 assign 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 times 2 For Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 assign 04 1 0mV V 14 2 0mV V or 24 3 0mV V O Ifthe value that has been set fails to satisfy the conditions the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence sjiejoq eyeq Bumes z 9 O If an error occurs the setting becomes invalid and the value that has been in the buffer memory is reset to the original value before the setting request was issued 135 19 Load cell rated output Un G52 This setting is used to set a load cell rated output The setting range is 3 to 30 0 3mV V to 3 0mV V a Default The default value is 30 3 0mV V Point O Satisfy the following conditions e Set a value within the set
43. Accordingly the tare zero offset output value will change from 0 6mV V to 1 0mV V e The A D converter gain will be unchanged Since the ratio of the maximum weighing capacity to Load cell rated capacity Un G50 UniG51 is unchanged the A D converter gain of 4 times will remain unchanged Load cell rated capacity 300kg x 4 O IP A A ca 0 g Fixed tare weighing capacity Span point 900 0 amp 5 y O l a pr l z int i Conversion range upper limit ea ces 2 309mV V c oO aaa aa al a l Load cell rated output S 4 300 0 0 0 2 pa Load cell output mV V l 0 0 0 4 08 12 1 6 2 309 A D conversion value 000000H i l 1 0 mV 0 5 mV V 0 5 mv 7FFFFFH gt n E a ae ae ad Sa Zero offset output value To 1 0mV V de a Jas LS Input value after zero offset mV V 0 0 0 5 O eee x NAAA To 8 0mV V R i e N c i T 22 i ee a A D converter gain 4 times 30 San 30 l ma gt W l a a pn 2 309 2 z nl gt gt lt LL y Input value after multiplication mV V 0 2 0 A 0 5x4 o AAN Gross weight output value x 10 kg T 0 3000 E J Q Do not load anymore e 1 Even if Load cell rated output Un G52 is changed from 1 2mV V to 2 0mV V as it is still within the range of 1mV Y to D oa 2 0mV the instrumentation amplifier gain of 0 to 2 0mV V will be applied 2 As the fixed tare weight corresponds to 1
44. CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING Measurement error Measurement completion value Measurement process completion Measurement completion value Discharge process start flag Wait for stability after discharge 191 O1JUOD JUNOWY JUB SUO JO ajdwex3 welbolg y 6 CHAPTER 10 oNLINE MODULE CHANGE 192 This chapter describes the online module change procedure using GX Works2 Online module change through GX Works2 can be performed only when the Q61LD is used in the MELSECNET H remote I O network If the Q61LD is not used in the MELSECNET H remote I O network use GX Developer to perform the online module change lt _ gt Page 268 Appendix 5 When performing an online module change read the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 1 Precautions for Online Module Change This section describes the precautions on online module change 1 Perform an online module change by the correct procedure gt Page 196 Section 10 4 Using incorrect procedures can cause malfunction or failure Perform an online module change after making sure that the system outside the programmable controller will not malfunction To prevent an electric shock and malfunction of operating modules provide means such as switches for powering off each of the external power supply and external devices connected to the module to be replaced online Record the following d
45. Checking the operation 1 To check the operation click the Online Module Change button to cancel Module Control Restart c Operation Target Module Module Change 1 0 Address ooo Execution m Module Name G61LD Statys T Module Control Change Module Installation Completion Restart Installation Confirmation m Shatusfauidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh For the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed button Execute 2 Click the button to suspend the MELSOFT Application Online Module Change mode Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not canceled i The online module change is stopped Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again Continued to the next page ajge eneup si wua s s JoUuJOUY u yM vonouny UONeuNByUOD y Ag 1as ae SUBJOWeIeY U YUM ZOL 213 Continued y System Monitor Monitor Status Connection Channel List Stop Monitor Serial Port NET 10 H Remote Module Connection RS 232C Mode C System Monitor Online Module Change Main Base Operation to Selected Module Main Base 0000 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0070 Slot 0 PP PP a Intelli Main Base Information List Module Information List Main Base 3 System Im
46. Default value write completion flag Data for b9 to b15 are fixed to 0 Data for b1 to b7 are fixed to 0 0 Off 1 Default value write abnormal completion flag e When the default setting registration by Default setting registration command Un G148 is completed Default value writing completion flag Un G149 bO turns to Default value writing completion 1 e After Default value writing completion 1 is stored in Default value writing completion flag Un G149 bO set Default setting registration command Un G148 back to Registration command Off 0 Default value writing completion flag Un G149 bO returns to Off 0 e When the default value registration is completed abnormally Default value writing completion flag Un G149 b8 turns to Default value writing failed 1 and Default value writing completion flag Un G149 bO turns to Default value writing completion 1 46 Latest error code Un G190 Un G1790 Error occurrence time Un G191 to Un G194 Un G1791 to Un G1794 The latest error code detected by the Q61LD and the error occurrence time can be checked e Error codes related to the channel are stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error codes unrelated to the channel are stored in Latest error code Un G1790 e The time of the latest error occurrence is stored in BCD code in Error occurrence time Un G191 to Un G194 Un G1791 to Un G1794 Buffer memory address Storage contents Year Un G191 Un G17
47. Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 was 10000 for the load cell output of 1 2mV V as Load cell rated output Un G52 was 1 2mV V When Load cell rated output Un G52 is changed to 2 4mV V Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 will be 10000 for the input of 2 4mV V The accuracy is 0 01 for 3 0mV V Point El D O O 9 2 600 0 4 Cc O E 300 0 O 0 0 d 2 When Load cell rated output Un G52 is changed from 1 2 mV V to 2 4mV V the conversion range becomes different When Load cell rated output Un G52 is 2 4mV V the instrumentation amplifier gain must be capable of converting the load cell output of OmV V to 3 0mV V Load cell rated capacity 300kg x 4 Conversion range upper limit 3 464mV V Load cell rated output Load cell output mV V 2 0 ED 3 0 3 464 A D conversion value 7FFFFFH 00 04 08 12 16 0000001 Digital output value 5000 7500 Accuracy 0 01 towards 0 0 to 3 0 mV V 10000 at the load cell rated output G ight output val 107 k 6000 0 3000 6000 ross Weight output value x g gt Do not load anymore 2 When Load cell rated output Un G52 is changed from 1 2mV V to 2 4mV V as it is within the range of 2 1mV V to 3 0mV V the instrumentation amplifier gain of O to 3 0mV V will be applied While the Q61LD itself can operate up to the input level of about 3 646mV V the load cell may be damaged because the level of 2 4mV V exceeds the corresponding
48. G70 Un G71 e Output value hold request Y3 e Maximum and minimum values reset request YD Input signal error detection signal XC and Input signal error detection flag Un G114 operate However ignore these signal and flag except when Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b3 turns to Conversion over 1 because they are error flags for Gross weight output value Un G100 UniG101 O Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 can be corrected by setting Digital output correction value Un G68 to UniG71 peo jenjoe ue noy im pauwlojiad si UOI euqieo uayM y Xipuaddy pasn si ue1Bo1y souanbas e usym uolne Jqijeo juod om y xipueddy 265 266 2 When Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is used The setting procedure is shown below 1 2 Turn on Two point calibration mode switch request YA Check that the signals and the LED are in the following status Two point calibration mode status flag XA ON Module ready X0 OFF RUN LED Flashing Set Conversion enable 0 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO and turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 Set the following buffer memory areas Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 Load cell rated output Un G52 Number of load cells in connection Un G53 Tare zero offset Un G54 Not used 1 Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 Decimal point posit
49. Lae 156 TAA Wining precautions dada kad ii de beans Nona aun be 156 TAQ ExtermalliwirinG ssc cidadenedeed ese ore da thud Oho cade seN Pee he bd ead ene eee 157 CHAPTER 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS 159 821 Adding Modules lt lt ios wah OE ow ee ea as hoe pede bee eee went 159 82 Parameter oele rro Peete tate lt die alte 160 89 Aulo Refresh SCTUING ince aiden arated acters ain dhs tise Sane Meee wees Bb haves eck moth eames 162 34 TWo opont Calibratlon c2s a cee oie rahe eee Bate eee ae hee 162 8 5 Default Setting Registration 1 2420 22260444 4 80c eeew seeded ateoe ads 162 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 163 9 1 Programming Procedure sta dla ew ttle sce ae ha ate walede es 164 9 2 Programming in Normal System Configuration 0 0 0 eee ees 165 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network 0 0 000 ccc eee eee eee 173 9 4 Program Example for Constant Amount Control 0 0 0 0c ees 187 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 192 10 1 Precautions for Online Module Change 0 0 ccc eens 193 10 2 Conditions of Online Module Change 0 cc ce eens 194 10 3 Operation during Online Module Change 0 0 00 ccc eee eens 195 10 4 Procedures of Online Module Change 0 0 eens 196 10 5 When Parameters are Set by the Configuration Function When Another System is Available Sire saa ee esas ree essa eal aa aA eras e ae Gee eee A 198 10 6 When Parameters are Set by a Sequence Program When Another System is Av
50. Master station data link status Remote l O station baton pass status Remote I O station data link status Remote l O station parameter communication status High speed timer for interlock for master station and remote I O station Gross weight output value Input signal error detection flag Setting a device storing a warning output flag Zero point adjustment completion flag 4 Precautions when using dedicated instructions Z P REMTO and Z P REMFR Dedicated instructions Z P REMTO and Z P REMEFR for reading and writing the buffer memory in an intelligent function module on a remote l O station are executed for over several scans Therefore they cannot be synchronized with X Y signals To read the gross weight output value of the Q61LD Conversion completion flag Un G113 must be read together Also when changing the initial setting an interlock needs to be provided to prevent Z P REMFR from being executed Refer to the processing for reading a gross weight output value in a program example provided in this section 175 YIOMISN O BIOWSY 104 BuluswwesHOlg 6 5 Setting on the master station side 1 Create a GX Works2 project Select QCPU Q mode from PLC Series and select the CPU module to be used from PLC Type Project gt New Project New Project Simple Project i Cancel Use Label PLE Series ocru 0 mode PLE Type Q10UBH Language Ladder
51. O station and click the button NET 10 H Remote FE Computer Type QI72LP25 BR15 No Specification Other Station Other Station Single Network Co existence Network Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 CC IE Cont CC IE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H 4 CCIECont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Multiple CPU Setting Continued to the next page Connection Channel List PLC Direct Coupled Setting Connection Test PLC Type Remotel O Detail System Image Phone Line Connection C24 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Continued Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor EP Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device WI n d OW Device Name Buffer Memory Module Start 0000 w HEX Address o0 v DEC TZ Online o gt Monitor o gt Device Buffer Memory Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Batch en AA A 6 oo otoj otojotojatojo oto orot oko o Enter the buffer memory address of Conversion 2 0 0 0000000000BBOBBO 10 y enable disable setting Un GO to display it 7 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Modify Value Conversion disable 1 DevicejLabel puffer Memory 8 Turnon Operating condition setting request Y9 Device Label 9 9 Check Conversion completion flag Un G113 to Data Type Bit confirm that
52. Outside the zero point range is cleared the following status will result e Input signal error detection flag Un G114 bO is reset to Normal 0 e Input signal error detection signal XC turns off e The ALM LED turns off 92 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 Conversion over available in any mode This notification will be provided when the input signal exceeds the range of input values that can be converted a Occurrence of conversion over Ex 1 When Conversion over automatic restoration setting Usable later than product is set to 1 Auto Restoration in the normal mode or when the system is in the two point calibration mode Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b3 will be set to Conversion over 1 when the analog input load cell output exceeds the conversion range Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 will be fixed at their values at the time of conversion over occurrence Ex 2 When Conversion over automatic restoration setting Usable later than product is set to 0 Auto Stop in the normal mode An error error code 99 will occur and the conversion process will be suspended when the analog input load cell output exceeds the conversion range Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 will be set to O b Clearing the conversion over 1 When conversion over occurs in the normal mode while Conversion over
53. Stable status time setting A R tracking range setting Zero Zero tracking time setting time setting 8H System area 124 13 Conversion over automatic restoration a Q I a T o A na AAA 118 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY Default Address Data o F setting P Description Read Write Hex H type registration command Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Gross weight lower lower limit value 194 25 setting H Gross weight lower upper limit value 1Ay 26 g pp setting L Gross weight lower upper limit value 1By 27 ann ian setting H Pr Rw O Gross weight upper lower limit value 1Cy 28 setting L G ight limit val 1Dy 29 dd weight upper lower limit value setting H Gross weight upper upper limit value 1Ey 30 l setting L 1F Gross a CC upper upper limit value H setting a CC 204 274 28 H Two point Two point setting 294 A point calibration method Two point calibration method setting 0000 y RW O 2Ay ML point calibration setting 2By Two Two point calibration request calibration request 2Cy pa area 2Dy a Zero point adjustment request E O 2Ey System area 30H 8 P Default setting registration O etap a II 324 Load cell rated capacity L 10000 33H Load cell rated capacity H 344 Pr Load cell rated output Rw O 35H Number of load cells in connection 36H Tare zero offset function si7 Aowa yng 19 38H A weighin
54. Stop Warning output setting warning 1 Suto Restoration UOHOUN4 UOI 99 8Qq 10443 euBis ndul Z1 p 95 4 12 1 Operation upon input signal error by the status of Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 The system operation upon occurrence of an input signal error largely depends on the status of Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 1 When Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 is set to Auto stop 0 When Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 is set to Auto stop 0 the conversion process will stop as soon as Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b3 is set to Conversion over 1 At this time Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 are fixed to O and all the bits of Input signal error detection flag Un G114 are set to OFF 0 For any other input errors detected Error clear request YF is required to clear them Ex The following timing chart shows the operation of auto stop for conversion over Error Gross weight output value Conversion range Excess of weighing Error clear capacity Line where Excess of weighing capacity can be reset Line where Input signal error can be reset Input signal error Maximum weighing capacity set value 10 divisions Input signal error detection setting Maximum weighing capacity setting 0 Conversion enable disable setting
55. There are no corresponding error codes 244 APPENDICES 5 Program example When M11 is turned on this program reads the data at the relevant buffer memory addresses from the Q61LD which is mounted on the slot to which I O numbers X Y0 to X YF are assigned to D100 to D185 Setting control data M11 S Ff M12 Reading two point setting values and two point calibration values 119 Hh U0 D100 M20 Dedicated instruction GP OGLOAD Executing processing at abnormal completion GvO190 d 9 L xipueddy suonon1 su pajesoipag xipuaddy 245 Appendix 1 2 G P OGSTOR Command G OGSTOR JL Command GP OGSTOR Setting Ea device a Constant UO GO Others data K H 1 Setting data Un Head I O number of module 16 bit binary Within the s 1 Head number of the device storing control data specified device Device name range Device turned on for one scan on completion of the processing of the dedicated Within the instruction specified device Bit In the event of abnormal completion D 1 also turns on range 4 When executing the G P OGLOAD instruction specify the device specified in S Do not change the data that have been read with the G P OGLOAD instruction If the data is changed normal operation is not guaranteed 246 APPENDICES 2 Control data Device Mem Setting data Setting range Set by o femme Y Y Stores status of when the instruc
56. Un G80 and A D converter gain setting Un G81 Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to Automatic setting 0 to perform two point calibration or reset the value of Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 within the range of 0 to 65535 Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to Automatic setting 0 to perform two point calibration or reset the value of Two point zero Calibration value Un G84 Un G85 within the range of 8388608 to 8388607 Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to Automatic setting 0 to perform two point calibration or reset the value of Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 within the range of 1 to 8388607 Reset the value of Averaging processing method setting Un G1 to any value of 0 2 3 and 5 Reset the value of Count average setting Un G2 within the range of 4 to 255 Reset the value of Moving average setting Un G3 within the range of 2 to 255 Reset the value of Stable status range setting Un G4 within the range of O to 100 Reset the value of Stable status time setting Un G5 within the range of O to 100 Reset the value of Zero tracking range setting Un G6 within the range of O to 100 Reset the value of Zero tracking time setting Un G7 within the range of 0 to 100 Reset the value of Input signal error detection setting Un G21 within the range of O to 250 Reset the value of Zero point range setting Un G22 w
57. When Averaging processing method setting Un G1 is Combination use of count average and moving average Sh 1000ms gt Count average setting x Moving average setting x 10ms 255 ainpsoojd pue Huas y xipuaddy pasn si ue1Bo1y souanbas e usym uone qijeo jurod om y xipueddy 2 Two point span calibration Perform two point span calibration with the weight of actual load standard weight of Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 placed on the weighing machine 1 Configure the following settings e Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to Automatic setting 0 default e Set Two point calibration setting Un G42 b1 to Two point span calibration enable 1 e Set Two point calibration request Un G43 b1 to Two point span calibration requested 1 2 The settings above automatically perform the following e The set value of Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 is stored in Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 e Values are stored in Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 3 After calibration is completed Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 b1 turns to Two point span calibration completion 1 Set Two point calibration request Un G43 b1 back to Two point span calibration not requested 0 When a two point span calibration is completed abnormally Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 b8 also turns to Two point calibratio
58. Works2 Unset Project PRG MAIN Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagnos uU 7 E 44 UH O A gt FS sFS F6 sF6 Fe F JE Dey Navigation Project Parameter Intelligent Function Module Global Device Comment Program Setting E POU B Program 48 MAIN By Local Device Comment 3 Device Memory Device Initial Value LE Connection Destination ua Unlabeled 11 Pages describing instructions are organized as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation Instruction name O shows the devices applicable to the instruction Descriptions of setting data and data type Descriptions of control data if any Detailed descriptions 6 4 2 Disconnecting a connection SP SOCCLOSE ommand SP SOCCLOSEN f H sesocciose uo 6 MIO DEE E R ZR nt EME Ki File registers set for each local device or program cannot be used Descrinth Connection number Setting range 1 to 16 Start number of the device from which control data are stored Start number of the device which turns on for one scan upon completion of the instruction 1 also tums on when failed 0000 Completed Other than 0000 Failed Error code 3S01090S dS vogyoeuuos e Bunoeuuoosid Vigo UOMONJSU LONOUN 4 UOHEDUNWWOD japoS rs Execution condition of the instruction Structure o
59. Zero set completion X100C KO 2 X100A KO gt ZP REMTO sJ K3 K1 HO K45 D1045 KI M270 Zero set request OFF M270 M271 SET M272 M272 D1145 0 RST M262 RST M322 RST M272 SET D1045 1 Zero reset request ON ZP REMTO J1 K5 K1 HO K45 D1045 KI M280 M280 M281 SET M282 MO M282 UR HH Z REMFR J1 K6 K1 HO K145 D1145 KI M330 M330 M331 SET M332 D1045 1 D1145 1 M332 l Ey a RST D1045 1 Zero reset completion KO gt KO gt T2P REMTO a K5 K1 HO K45 D1045 KI M290 Zero reset request OFF M290 M291 SET M292 M292 D1145 1 RST M282 M280 M281 RST M332 M330 M331 k RST M292 M290 M291 m MCR NO END 186 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 9 4 Program Example for Constant Amount Control Create a constant amount control program as an example of user application Under constant amount control materials are sent out by a certain amount from a tank such as a constant amount control hopper Use this program example together with the one provided in Page 165 Section 9 2 D20 D21 D32 D33 Overweight underweight judgment value Measurement ff Naaa D16 D17 Overweight setting setting A A En o IE ee D24 D25 D12 D13 Head tion setting Supply oe eee eee D18 D19 Underweight setting completion D10 D11 oe D26 D27 Setting before quantity i D4 D5 Small quantity determination J l i Gross weight output
60. a summing box 2 The calibration values may be set by the user However it is done for the case any backup data of the two point calibration value is to be reflected to the system or when any fine adjustment is required after automatic adjustment has been performed once 154 7 3 CHAPTER 7 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION Part Names This section describes the part names of the Q61LD aL LAE _ dk _ AM jco Sl ala Els S S S o oo soln Seo n gt gt RUN LED ERR LED ALM LED Terminal block Serial number display Terminal Signal name number 2 5VDC 1 EXC Load cell applied voltage terminal 3 2 5VDC 5 EXC Load cell applied voltage terminal Load cell output 9 SIG l Terminal analog input Load cell output 11 SIG l Terminal analog input 14 SLD Shield ground terminal A Q E Sa J i y JS Spare Description Indicates the operating status of the Q61LD ON Normal operation Flashing Two point calibration mode OFF 5VDC power is interrupted watchdog timer error generated or when the module can be replaced by online module change Indicates the error status of the Q61LD ON Error Flashing Switch setting error error code 2 OFF Normal operation Indicates the warning status of the Q61LD ON Warning upper and lower limit alarm Flashing Input signal error Input signal error
61. after completing the measurement This function can be used in every mode For each weight conversion the variation of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is compared with the value of Stable status range setting Un G4 If the variation is larger than Stable status time setting Un G5 Stable status X1 turns off Gross weight output value Stable status range Time EURPA E ARA Stable status X1 1 Setting method 1 Seta value in Stable status range setting snje1s SIQEIS GLY H MOVING average sering 10 MES Stable status range setting Fo 2 Seta value in Stable status time setting ries A eee eis Stable status time setting 10D Item Setting value Stable status range setting 0 to 100 x Minimum division Un G58 Stable status time setting 0 to 100 x 100ms 2 a Set Minimum division Un G58 in the Scale Initial Setting window Scale Initial Setting _ gt Page 64 Section 4 8 2 3 2 Although it is set in 100ms increments the internal processing is performed with the interval of 10ms times Count average setting Point If either Stable status range setting or Stable status time setting is set to 0 the stable status function is disabled 105 4 1 6 Maximum and Minimum Values Hold Function The maximum and minimum output values are stored in the areas from Maximum gross weight output value L Un G104 to Minimum gross weight o
62. and lower limit alarm outputs A warning signal can be output when the gross weight output value reaches the upper or lower limit set by the user 8 Input signal error detection function Any error in the gross weight output value can be detected upon weighing or upon setting the zero point 15 16 9 Online module change is available The module can be replaced without stopping the system Furthermore the settings before replacement can be maintained through the following operations to use sequence programs e Maintaining the two point setting value and two point calibration value set in the Q61LD before online module change e Transferring the two point setting value and the two point calibration value to another Q61LD mounted on a different slot 10 Easy setting by GX Works2 The number of programs can be reduced since the initial settings and auto refresh setting can be performed on the window Also checking the setting and operation status of modules becomes easier CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 Control System to Use the Q61LD The Q61LD can be used as a weighing machine by connecting a load cell and performing actual load calibration Ex Control system for constant amount powder dispenser 71 Measures the weight of the material in the scale hopper using the Q61LD 2 Controls the valve and feeder to control the dispensing amount of the material 3 Controls the discharging valve to put the measured material in the mi
63. cable for faulty locations Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to check whether a value is stored in Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 Check the following settings on the monitor window of the programming tool e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 e Load cell rated output Un G52 e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 e Tare zero offset Un G54 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 e Decimal point position Un G59 e Unit Un G60 e Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 e Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 e Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 e Digital output zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 e Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 If the setting is incorrect turn on Two point calibration mode switch request YA to switch the mode to two point calibration mode and reset the value When two point calibration is performed take the action written in Perform two point calibration again the right column Check the following setting values on the monitor window of the programming tool e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 If the calibration value is
64. cover the ferrule of solderless terminals with a marking tube or insulation tubing Ground the shield of shielded wires or shielded cables at a single point Before starting the wiring work to connect load cells disconnect all lines of the external power supply to the system Failure to disconnect all lines can result in an excessive voltage applied to the load cell causing heat generation or damage of the load cell To comply with the EMC and Low Voltage Directives use shielded twisted pair cables and the AD75CK cable clamp supplied by Mitsubishi to ground the shields to the panel Inside a control panel Strip off the outer sheath 20 to 30cm 7 87 to 11 81 inch For more details refer to the following AD75CK type Cable Clamping Instruction Manual 156 CHAPTER 7 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 7 4 2 External wiring Examples of external wiring of the Q61LD are shown below For the wiring the following two points are recommended e Use 6 wire type connection e Install the summing box at a location near to the load cell side In addition the resistance of the conducting wire that connects between the Q61LD and the load cell must not exceed 90 1 6 wire type connection The analog input load cell output terminals of the Q61LD are designed for the 6 wire type to use remote sensing The following figure sho
65. data of which content has been recorded beforehand and click the nn Modify Value button Turn on Two point calibration mode switch request YA to switch to the two point calibration mode Set the buffer memory data with the settings that have been recorded beforehand For Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 and Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 multiply the values by the corresponding correction factors Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to User setting 1 and Two point setting Un G40 to Write 1 10 Turn on Two point setting request Y7 11 After checking that Two point setting completion flag X7 is off turn off Two point setting request Y7 12 Before the control is started check the following status of the Q61LD If an error occurs refer to Troubleshooting gt Page 235 Section 11 2 to take corrective actions e The RUN LED is on e The ERR LED is off e Error flag XF is off 5 Restarting control Online Module Change Operation m Target Module Module Change HO Address o000 Execution 06110 Installation Module Name R Confirmation Skakus ve Module Control Change Module Installation Completion Restart Estatus Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh For the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and
66. e The gradient of the line connecting the ZERO and SPAN points when the signal is converted to the gross weight output value lt gt Page 29 Section 3 1 1 2 This section explains the conversion characteristics when the tare zero offset function is not used For the tare zero offset function refer to the following e Tare Zero Offset Function 2_ Page 51 Section 4 6 S9I SIJ9J0BJBY9 UOISISAVOD LE suoneooads aoueuoJad p e 21 1 Analog to digital conversion characteristics The following figure shows the analog to digital conversion characteristics of the Q61LD 10751 7 7 20000 ETT T F yF y ab o YA MN j VA 5 gt 5000 2 gt O 2500 v 5 3 gt _I 2 0 O amp D Q 2500 15mV 10mV 5mV 0mV 5mV 10mV 15mV Load cell output value Analog input range Digital output TER No setting load cell Zero value Span value l value resolution rated output 4 When the analog input voltage exceeds the corresponding range of the digital output data the resulting digital output value will be fixed to the maximum value 10751 or the minimum value 10752 Point Use the Q61LD within the specified analog input range load cell rated output and the digital output range When the digital output range is exceeded the maximum resolution and accuracy specifications of the Q61LD may not be guaranteed The above broken lines indicate the out of range areas for the digital output data
67. eBueyo snpoyy suuo G xipueddy 283 284 5 Restarting control Online module change E MELSOFT series GX Developer E dy 1 Open the Online module change window again 2 Click the Module ready X0 turns on button to restart control 3 This completes the online module change procedures APPENDICES Appendix 6 External Dimensions 98 3 86 0 15 90 3 54 Unit mm SUOISUBUUIG eulajx3 9 xipuaddy 285 A D converter gain setting Un G81 144 A A A heated 30 AD75CK cable claMp o oo 156 Adding modules o o o ooooooo o 159 Additions and Changes of Functions by Upgrade A A NA 250 ALM CED cesar ee a a RR Be AS eS a 155 Auto refresh setting 162 Averaging processing method setting Un G1 126 Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 ING G7 shiek eee a eae 141 Center point 1 4 scale detection function 102 Combination use of count average and moving average ee ee ee eee ee eee ae ere eee a 85 Conversion characteristics 2 Conversion completion flag Un G113 147 Conversion enable disable function 49 Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 126 Conversion over 2 2 ee ee es 93 Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 ti We ato Y Sab deat a set ad ae 130 Correction factor calculating method 2
68. error still exists after these actions are taken the module may be in failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative The values that have been set to the following are invalid e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 e Load cell rated output Un G52 e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 e Tare zero offset Un G54 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 e Decimal point position Un G59 e Unit Un G60 e Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 e Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Conversion enable 0 to perform two point calibration again or set values in the following e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 100 Moderate Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 so e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 e Digital output zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 Un G85 e Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 saa l i i i e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Or the values that have been set to the following are invalid Un G87 e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 If the same error occurs the module may be in e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 Two point
69. executions and automatic refresh hor the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed button Ecce Cancel 3 This completes the online module change MELSOFT Application procedus 1 Online module change completed a qe 1eny si ua s s Jeyjouy u yM UONOUNY uonelnbiuoo y Ag jas sue siajaoweleg uaym FOL 203 10 6 When Parameters are Set by a Sequence Program When Another System is Available 1 Stopping the operation 1 Create a new project New Project Project Type ke Project gt New Simple Project 2 Inthe PLC Type field select Use Label PLC Series QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O and click the OK button PLO Type Q1721P25 Q1728R 15 Rematel o S Language Ladder y eN EA MOT 3 Open the Connection Destination window e Navigation window gt Connection destination Mea view gt Connection data name Current Connection Set it to enable access to the modules of the remote Transfer Setup Connection1 f as UN i CCIE Cont CC Link Ethernet CCIE Field Q Series NET II 5 5 i NET 10 H Board Board Board Bus Board I O stat l O n a n d Cc l C k th e E Board le COM com 1 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps button CC IE Field CCIE Field CC IE Field MAC A6 Q6TEL NET 10 H Master Local Communication Ethernet Remote Module Head Module Adapter Computer Type QI72LP25 BR15 J Ga Conne
70. flag XF is off Execution Result Cevice Label Data Type Bit Bit Bit a must be configured through a sequence program 10 Since the new module is in default initial setting after starting control Before configuring the initial mala Ga aaa Delete C setting check the following point to see if the content of the initial setting program is correct e Add an user device to perform the initial setting Initial setting request signal in the sequence program at any timing After the control restarted turn on Initial setting request signal to perform the initial setting The settings will not be configured if the sequence program is specified to configure the settings only to one scan after the data link of the remote I O network is established a qe 1eny si ua s s JoujouY u yM WesboJY ssuanbas e Aq Je s1aJolueJeg U YUM O OL 209 10 7 When Parameters are Set by the Configuration Function When Another System is Unavailable 1 Stopping the operation New Project Project Type Simple Project Use Label PLO Series PLE Type Q172LP25 03728R15 Remote1 O S Language Ladder i Transfer Setup Connection1 a i CCIE Field Q Series SB E Board Bus COM com 1 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps CC IE Field CCIE Field CC IE Field MAC 46 Q6TEL Bus Master Local Communication Ethernet Module Head Module Adapter Computer Type QJF2LP25 BR15 a No Specification O
71. gt Module Name gt Parameter Warning output setting l l loan prea O Warning Output Enabled Warning output setting input O Warning Output Enabled signal error detection 1 Warning Cutput Disabled 2 Set values in Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Gross weight lower upper limit value setting Gross weight upper lower limit value setting and Gross weight upper upper limit value setting uonounY mdmo Bumulem Err Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Gross weight lower upper limit value setting Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Gross weight upper upper limit g value settin 2000 5000 7000 10000 Item Setting value Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Gross weight lower upper limit value setting 99999 to 99999 Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Gross weight upper upper limit value setting 101 4 14 Center Point 1 4 scale Detection Function This function automatically detects the center point of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 The center point is determined by dividing Minimum division Un G58 by 4 If Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is within the center point range Center point status X2 turns on The center point 1 4 scale detection function is available in all modes Gross weight output value n Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 integral multiple of Minimum divisio
72. gt Module name gt Parameter Warning output setting warning output 1 Warning Output Disabled Warming output setting finput _ i pi a ae ee r O Input signal error detection enable Input signal error detection setting Mae lt lt Zero point range setting 1 Input signal error detection disable 2 Entera proper value into Input signal error detection setting signal error detection as Input signal error detection 509 llle Item Setting value Input signal error detection setting 0 0 to 25 0 b Weighing capacity over 1 Set Warning output setting input signal error detection to 0 Input signal error detection enable Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Parameter Warning output setting warning output 1 Warning Output Disabled Warning output setting final signal error detection O Input signal error detection enable Input signal error detection setting Eater APEE Zero point range setting 1 Input signal error detection disable 2 Set Conversion over automatic restoration setting Usable later than product to 0 Auto Stop or 1 Auto Restoration Stop conversion over automatic O Auto Stop restoration setting Usable oa oe fater than product Warning output function 0 Auto Stop Warning output setting warning 1 Auto Restoration CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION c Outside the zero point range 1 Set Warning output sett
73. incorrect When the following setting values are corrected by users take the action written in the right column e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value turn on Two point calibration mode Un G86 Un G87 switch request YA to switch the mode to two point calibration mode and rewrite the calibration value The module may be in failure if the measured weight value cannot be read after proper corrective actions have been taken according to the above check items Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative 23 ewJouqe si anjea jybiem palnseau e uaym 6 Z LL BunooysalqnolL Z 11 2 10 When the two point zero calibration is completed abnormally Check item Is Two point calibration request Un G43 bO set to Two point zero calibration requested 1 in the normal mode Or is Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 set to Two point zero calibration requested 1 with Two point calibration setting Un G42 not set to Two point Zero calibration enable 1 Corrective action Set Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 to Two point zero calibration requested 1 in the two point calibration mode Or set Two point calibration setting Un G42 b0 to Two point zero calibration enable 1 and set Two point calibr
74. manuals QnUCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals LEI An H QnPH QnPRHCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals O Operating procedures are explained using GX Works2 When using GX Developer refer to the following e When Using GX Developer 2_ Page 251 Appendix 3 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to the manual included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures To ensure that this product maintains EMC and Low Voltage Directives please refer to the manual included with the CPU module or base unit RELEVANT MANUALS 1 CPU module user s manual Manual name Description lt manual number model code gt QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Specifications of the hardware CPU modules power supply modules Inspection base units extension cables and memory cards system maintenance lt SH 080483ENG 13JR73 gt and inspection troubleshooting and error codes QnUCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals lt SH 080807ENG 13JZ27 gt Functions methods and device
75. new module from the separate system and insert it into the same slot where the original module was mounted Then mount the terminal block Mount the new module to the same slot and connect external wires After the module is secured in place click the E button and check that the RUN LED turns on Module ready X0 remains off APPENDICES 4 Checking the operation 1 To check the operation click the Online module change See elena y button to cancel the restart O0 address OOOH Module change execution i e Module name QE1LO Installation confirmation Module control restart i l Change module installation completion m Status r Status Guidance The controls such as 10 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wining etc and execute Evecubior MELSOFT series GX Developer Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not cancelled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again i The online module change mode is stopped System Monitor _ 3 Click the Installed status Base oiee Pasa Modu MasterPLC gt MA 7 Unmoj Unmoj Unmoj Unmoj Unmoj Unmo unti funti funti funti funti funti ng ng jng jng jng button to
76. on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence O ifan error occurs the setting becomes invalid and the value that has been in the buffer memory is reset to the original value before the setting request was issued 138 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 24 Decimal point position Un G59 This setting is used to specify how many digits after the decimal point of the load cell rated capacity maximum weighing capacity and standard weight are displayed as a digital output This setting does not affect Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital output value Un G102 UniG103 Decimal point position Setting value x 10 On x 107 14 x 10 24 x 107 3H x 10 4 a Default x10 0 1 is set by default Point If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions and the information on errors that occur refer to the following e Minimum division Un G58 lt 3 Page 138 Section 6 2 23 25 Unit Un G60 This setting is used to set the units of load cell rated capacity maximum weighing capacity and standard weight O This setting does not affect Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital output value Un G102 N 0 UniG103 D Unit Setting value 5 fa g OH O D kg 1H al t 2H a Default kg 1 is set by default Point If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions
77. press completed button E Cancel MELSOFT Application LI Online module change completed 3 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Open the Online Module Change window again Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Click the Module ready X0 turns on This completes the online module change procedures button to restart control 215 ajge eneupn si wua s s Jaeyjouy u yM vonouny vonelnbiuos y Ag 1as ae s1ajawueJleg U YUM ZOL 10 8 When Parameters are Set by a Sequence Program When Another System is Unavailable 1 Stopping the operation New Project Project Type Simple Project Use Label PLO Series PLE Type Q172LP25 03728R15 Remote1 O B Language Ladder 4 ESE E EA Sl a MO ON Connection Destination A eai E Current Connection Transfer Setup Connection1 216 4 gs ion Serial CCIE Cont CC Link Ethernet CCIE Field Q Series USB NET 1O H Board Board Board Bus Board com com 1 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps CC IE Field CCIE Field CC IE Field MAC 46 Q6TEL Master Local Communication Ethernet Module Head Module Adapter 1 Create a new project Project 2 gt New 2 Inthe PLC Type field select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O and click the CE button J 3 Open the Connection Destination window Navigation window gt Connection destination view gt Connection data name o y I
78. refer to the following e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 Page 135 Section 6 2 18 137 sjiejoq ejeq Bumes z 9 23 Minimum division Un G58 This setting is used to set the minimum division of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 does not affect this setting Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 changes according to the value of minimum division relative to 0 Set a multiple of minimum division for Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Warnings are detected in units of minimum divisions of Gross weight output value Un G100 UniG101 Minimum division Setting value 1 OH 2 i 5 24 10 3H 20 4y 50 5H Ex Suppose Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 is set to 10001 and Minimum division Un G58 is set to 10 3 When Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 becomes 10100 not 10092 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b1 becomes Weighing capacity over 1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b1 becomes Weighing capacity over 1 under the following condition Gross weight Maximum weighing Minimum output value gt Capacity setting 4 division x 9 UniG 100 Un G101 Un G56 Un G57 Un G58 a Default 1 0 is set by default Point O lf a value outside the setting range is written the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns
79. signal error detection signal XC Error clear request YF p Executed in a sequence program ES gt Executed by the Q61LD 10 Maximum and minimum values reset completion flag XD Maximum and minimum values reset request YD e When Maximum and minimum values reset request YD is turned on the maximum and minimum values of gross weight output and digital output stored in Maximum gross weight output value L Un G104 to Minimum gross weight output value H Un G107 and Maximum digital output value L Un G108 to Minimum digital output value H Un G111 are updated to the current values When the maximum and minimum values of gross weight output and digital output are cleared Maximum and minimum values reset completion flag XD turns on Use Maximum and minimum values reset completion flag XD as an interlock to turn on and off Maximum and minimum values reset request YD Gross weight output maximum value Un G104 Un G105 Gross weight output minimum value Un G106 Un G107 Digital output maximum value Un G108 Un G109 y Digital output minimum value UniG 110 Un G111 5 Maximum and minimum values reset request YD Maximum and minimum values reset completion flag XD Executed in a sequence program a Executed by the Q61LD 11 Conversion completion signal XE This signal turns on upon completion of conversion CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS SENT TO FROM CPU MODULE 12 Error flag XF
80. such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh For the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed button Cancel E 3 This completes the online module change MELSOFT Application procedures Ll wl Online module change completed ajgepeneupn si wa s s Jaeyjouy u yM wepold souanbas e Aq Jas Je s19JolueJeg YAUM QOL 221 10 9 Save Restoration Setting List This section lists the data that are saved restored during online module change Record the data to be saved two point setting value two point calibration value and factory default setting value beforehand if another system is not available or to be prepared for the case the data may not be correctly saved due to module failure Address Data Description Target Hex H type 33H Load cell rated capacity H Two point setting value 434 Calibration site gravitational acceleration H 464 Digital output span correction value L 4TH Digital output span correction value H 53H Tare zero offset output value H Two point calibration value 941 Two point zero calibration value L 7 56H E Two point span calibration value L 1 S H Two point span calibration value H 64E 1 0mV V zero calibration value L 64F y 1 0mV V zero calibration value H 6524 2 0mV V zero calibration value L 6534H 2 0mV V zero calibration value H 6544 2 0mV V span calibration value L 222 CHAPTER 1
81. tare function Setting value Used On Not used 1H a Default Used 0p is set by default Point O if Not used 1H is set to Tare zero offset Un G54 any value written to A D converter gain setting Un G81 or Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 is ignored O lf a value outside the setting range is written the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence O f an error occurs the setting becomes invalid and the value that has been in the buffer memory is reset to the original value before the setting request was issued When the tare zero offset function is used it may take a few seconds to perform two point zero calibration When performing two point calibration do not change the analog input until Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 bO shows Two point zero calibration completion 1 after Two point calibration request Un G43 bO executes Two point zero calibration requested 1 22 Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 This setting is used to set the rated capacity value required for use as a weighing machine The setting range is 1 to 99999 32 bit signed binary a Default The default value is 10000 Point If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions and the information on errors that occur
82. the conversion is stopped and turn off ore Operating condition setting request Y9 Settable Range Execution Result lt lt Execution Result Device Label Data Type Setting Value Bit OFF Bit On Bit On Reflect to Input Column Delete 10 If the content of the buffer memory has not been recorded beforehand record the content by referring to the following procedures 11 to 14 11 Set Two point setting Un G40 to Read 0 12 Turn on Two point setting request Y7 13 After checking that Two point setting completion flag X7 is off turn off Two point setting request Y7 14 To record the setting details refer to Save Restoration Setting List gt Page 222 Section 10 9 ajgereneun si wa s s Jaeyjouy u yM wepold souanbas e Aq Jas Je s19JolueJeg U UM QOL 217 2 Removing the module System Monitor Monitor Status Connection Channel List Stop Monitor Serial Port NET 10 H Remote Module Connection RS 232C System Image Mode C System Monitor Online Module Change Main Base Operation to Selected Module Main Base 0000 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0070 Slot CPU PP o QI72LP25 25 2 a PEO seses serrated Main Base Information List Module Information List Main Base el se lled ase 7 i Parameter o letwork No Master Base Module Base Model Name a pan Slots Ieras atus e Point Type Piven eee rg ee Main Base Power Power
83. the range of 2 to 255 1202 Minor The value set in Stable status range setting Un G4 is outside the range of O to 100 1203 Minor The value set in Stable status time setting Un G5 is outside the range of 0 to 100 1204 Minor The value set in Zero tracking range setting Un G6 is 1205 Minor outside the range of O to 100 The value set in Zero tracking time setting Un G7 is outside the range of 0 to 100 1206 Minor The value set in Input signal error detection setting Un G21 is outside the range of 0 to 250 1210 Minor The value set in Zero point range setting Un G22 is outside the range of 0 to 100 1211 Minor 2 Li 230 Corrective action Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to Automatic setting 0 to perform two point calibration or reset the values of Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 and Load cell rated output Un G52 Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to Automatic setting 0 to perform two point calibration or reset the value of A D converter gain setting Un G81 within the range of O to 5 Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to Automatic setting 0 to perform two point calibration or reset the values of Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 Load cell rated output Un G52 Number of load cells in connection Un G53 Maximum weighting capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Instrumentation amplifier gain setting
84. to 99999 The value set in Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 does not meet the condition Maximum weighing capacity setting lt Load cell rated capacity x Number of load cells in connection The value set in Minimum division Un G58 is outside the range of 0 to 5 The value set in Decimal point position Un G59 is outside the range of 0 to 4 The value set in Unit Un G60 is outside the range of 0 to 2 The value set in Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 is outside the range of 1 to 99999 The value set in Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 does not meet the condition Standard weight setting lt Maximum weighing capacity setting The value set in Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 is outside the range of 97000 to 99999 Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 is outside the range of 97000 to 99999 The value set in Digital output zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 is outside the range of 65536 to 65535 The value set in Digital output span correction value Un G70 UniG71 is outside the range of 65536 to 65535 The value set in Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 is outside the range of 0 to 2 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Corrective action Reset the value of Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 within the range of 1 to 999999 Reset the value of Load cell rated output Un G52 within the range of 3 to 30
85. up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 289 Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SH NA 080821ENG C 290 SH NA 080821ENG C 1202 MEE MODEL Q61LD U SY E MODEL CODE 13JZ31 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
86. used for screen names and items 1 shows operating procedures shows mouse operations is used for items in the menu bar and the project window shows setting or operating examples Ll shows reference manuals ES shows reference pages 1 Menu bar YZ Online 2 gt Write to PLC Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC A window selected in the view selection area is displayed O Project window 5 gt Parameter MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation ri Type 1 Setting parameters a Model Name Points Start XY Such Setting Detaled Setting gt PLC Parameter Select Project from the view selection area to open the Project window In the Project window expand Parameter and select PLC Parameter View selection area Setting method The chapter of the current page is shown Operating procedure E Open th PLC Parameter ialog box pl LO Project window lt gt Parameter gt PLC parameter Select the I O Assignment tab Amigrirg the LO address le ret necessary as the CPU doss t automaticaly Leong thes setting blank wil net cause an amor to ocow Select the type of the connected module Page 74
87. weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un 57 e Under the following conditions the most proper value is automatically set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 is set to Automatic setting 0 and Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 is set to Two point zero calibration requested 1 A D converter gain setting Setting value x 1 OH x 2 1H x 4 2H x 8 3H x 16 Ay x 32 5H Point O If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions and the information on errors that occur refer to the following e Minimum division Un G58 _ 3 Page 138 Section 6 2 23 When Tare zero offset Un G54 is set to Not used 1 A D converter gain setting works as x 1 even when any other value is written O When Two point calibration method setting Un G41 is set to Automatic setting 0 any value directly set in A D converter gain setting Un G81 is ignored 144 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 32 Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e An offset output value is set to erase the fixed tare weight e This setting is enabled when Tare zero offset Un G54 is set to Used 0 When Tare zero offset Un G54 is set to Not used 1 tare zero offset output value is assumed to be 0 e A tare zero offset output value can be set by Automatic setting 0 or User setting 1 of Two point calibration method setting Un G41 e To set an output value while setting Two point calibration method s
88. x 10 50 ms The average value will be output every 50ms 4 3 Sampling cycle 10ms 6 10 11 12 gt gt Weight 1st storage a 2nd storage b gt P Time ms ON Conversion completion signal XE or DDT _ ___l Conversion completion flag Un G113 Conversion stop 0 Conversion completion 1 Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 0 b Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 a b Data transition in buffer memory 1st storage a 2nd storage b 2 FIS 7 9 10 3 3 83 poya UVOISISALOD JYBISM 6 p 3 Moving average processing Each time the data is sampled the resulting Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 and Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 are averaged over a predefined number of samples Then the averaged values are stored into the buffer memory As the moving average processing is performed for each sample the latest Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 and Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 can be obtained a Setting method 1 Set Averaging processing method setting to 3 Moving Average Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Parameter o Aera ging processing ERT Method setting 3 Mowing Average oe Count average setting 0 Sampling Processing H Moving average setting Count Average Stable status range setting Moving Average 5 Combination Use of C
89. 0 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Address Data Description Target Hex H Decimal ype 655 1621 2 0mV V span calibration value H 6564 1622 3 0mV V zero calibration value 3 0mV V zero calibration value L 6574 1623 3 0mV V zero calibration value 3 0mV V zero calibration value H Factory default setting value 6584 1624 3 0mV V 3 0mV V span calibration value L calibration value L 6594 1625 3 0mV V 3 0mVIV span calibration value H calibration value H When dedicated instructions are used the value is restored being multiplied by the correction factor e Correction Factor Calculating Method gt Page 224 Section 10 10 1S Bunjos uoesojsoy ares 6 01 223 10 10 Correction Factor Calculating Method When another system is not available or when the data has not been normally saved due to any module failure it becomes necessary to manually restore the data In such a case for Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 and Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 multiply the original value by an applicable correction factor before the restoration The two point zero calibration value and two point span calibration value after online module change must be as given below Two point zero calibration value after replacement Two point zero calibration value before replacement x Correction factor Two point span calibration value after replacement Two point span calibration va
90. 000 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0071 Slot CPU Q ee nd QJ72LP25 25 E isimin nesies ES Module Information List Main Base Main Base Information List Base Module Base Model Name Po E Slots ne pie atus pod i e Poin no Address Station No PLC Power Pow Extension Base1 CA cr S Extension Base2 0 0 Q Q61LD 16Point Intelli 16Point 0000 Extension Base3 Empty Empty 16Poir Extension Base4 Empty Empty 16Poir Extension BaseS Empty Empty 16Point 0030 t t 0010 t t Extension Base Empty Empty 16Point 0040 t t t 0020 Extension Base Empty Empty 16Point 0050 Empty Empty 16Poin Empty Empty 16Poin 0060 0070 A Moderate Error Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Module Changing Major Error I O Network No Master ion Ni Online Module Change P ies Change JO Address r Execution Installation Confirmation VE 1 Target Module Module Mame Q6ILD m Status ke Module Selection Completed Module Control Restart gt Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module hen vou change the intelligent Function module Please press next button when you are ready LE CURE Point Open the System Monitor window of the remote I O station DO Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Select Online Module Ch
91. 0000 at the load cell rated output Gross weight output value x 10 kg 6000 Accuracy 0 01 towards 0 0 to 2 0 mV V of load 0 at Zero point Do not load anymore 2 3000 at span point since the maximum weighing capacity setting is 3000 1 As Load cell rated output Un G52 is within the range of 1 1mV V to 2 0mV V the instrumentation amplifier gain of O to 2 0mV V will be applied 2 While the Q61LD itself can operate up to the input level of about 2 309mV V the load cell may be damaged because the level of 1 2mV V exceeds the corresponding load cell specification limit 41 pasn zou SI UONOUNJ Jasyo 019Z SJE ay U YM l py coran ZOLD UN anjea mdimo e161q pue LOLS UN OOLS UN anjer mdino juBbiem ssolo jo vonelado p 1 Load on the load cell kg 42 200 0 900 0 600 0 300 0 0 0 a Modified case 1 When Load cell rated output Un G52 shown in the example conditions is changed from 1 2mV V to 2 0mV V e Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 Although the ZERO point and SPAN point will change the output value of 0 to 3000 maximum weighing capacity for the load cell load of 600 0kg to 900 0kg is unchanged e Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 In the previous example Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 was 10000 for the load cell output of 1 2mV V as Load cell rated output Un G52 was 1 2mV V When Load cell rated output Un G52 is changed to 2 0mV V Digi
92. 1 Two point span calibration enable a Default Two point zero calibration disable 0 and Two point span calibration disable 0 are set by default 133 15 Two point calibration request Un G43 This setting requests two point calibration Two point zero calibration and two point span calibration cannot be requested simultaneously b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 Data for b2 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Two point zero calibration requested off 1 Two point zero calibration requested 0 Two point span calibration requested off 1 Two point span calibration requested a Default Two point zero calibration not requested 0 and Two point span calibration not requested 0 are set by default Point O Set the following before two point calibration e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 e Load cell rated output Un G52 Number of load cells in connection Un G53 e Tare zero offset Un G54 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 e Minimum division Un G58 e Decimal point position Un G59 Unit Un G60 e Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 e Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 e Digital output zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 e Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 O if Two point zero calibration disable 0 is set to Two point calibration setting Un G42 b0 and
93. 10 M211 r ET M212 M102 MOV HO D1019 MOV HO D1020 MOV K50 D1021 MOV K100 D1022 M103 x1000 xX1009 Y1009 M212 A AANA 9 KO gt IZP REMTO J K1 K1 HO K19 D1019 K4 M220 M220 M221 man SET M222 M102 DMOV K 100 D1024 DMOV K 50 D1026 DMOV K2450 D1028 DMOV K2500 D1030 M103 x1000 X1009 Y1009 M222 a aN 0 KO gt 1ZP REMTO tT K1 K1 HO K24 D1024 K8 M230 M230 M231 FSET M232 gt Conversion enable Averaging processing method setting Count average setting Moving average setting Stable status range setting Stable status time setting Zero tracking range setting Zero tracking time setting Writing to buffer memory Excess of input values to be converted Operation stop Warning output setting Enable Input signal error detection setting Zero point range setting Writing to buffer memory Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Gross weight lower upper limit value setting Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Gross weight upper upper limit value setting Writing to buffer memory CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING M103 X1000 X1009 Y1009 M232 Ty _J S A O SET Y1009 Operating condition setting request ON Y1009 RST M212 M210 M211 RST M222 M220 M221 RST M232 M230 M231 X1000 Y1009 X1009 Ay y A RST Y1009 X1009 X100F RA A a a_i SET M104 X100F Operating condition setting request OFF H Z REMFR J1 K1 K1 HO K1800 D1190 Ki M300 Reading of err
94. 100 Un G101 to check if the value has been correctly converted Turn Two point calibration mode switch request YA from on to off so that the module switches to the normal mode Before starting control check the following items of the Q64ADH If anything is wrong refer to Troubleshooting gt Page 235 Section 11 2 to take corrective actions e The RUN LED is on e The ERR LED is off e Error flag XF is off Since the new module is in default initial setting must be configured through a sequence program after starting control Before configuring the initial setting check the following point to see if the content of the initial setting program is correct e For the standard system configuration Use a sequence program that configures the initial setting at the rising edge of Module ready X0 When the module control is restarted Module ready X0 turns on and the initial setting is configured The settings will not be configured if the program is specified to configure the settings only to one scan after a RUN e When the module is used in a remote I O network Add an user device to perform the initial setting Initial setting request signal in the sequence program at any timing After the control restarted turn on Initial setting request signal to perform the initial setting The settings will not be configured if the sequence program is specified to configure the settings only to one scan after the data link of
95. 11 2 0mV V span calibration value Un G1620 Un G1621 2 0mV V lt Load cell rated output lt 3 0mV V 24 3 0mV V span calibration value Un G1624 Un G1625 peo jenjoe ue noy im pauwlojiad si UOI euqieo uayM y Xipuaddy pasn si ue1Bo1y souanbas e usym uolne Jqijeo juod om y xipueddy 267 Appendix 5 Online Module Change When GX Developer is Used This section describes the online module change procedure using GX Developer When performing an online module change read the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Appendix 5 1 Precautions for online module change 268 This section describes the precautions on online module change 4 Perform an online module change by the correct procedure lt gt Page 271 Appendix 5 4 Failure to follow the correct procedure can cause the module to fail or malfunction Perform an online module change after making sure that the system outside the programmable controller will not malfunction To prevent an electric shock and malfunction of operating modules provide means such as switches for powering off each of the external power supply and external devices connected to the module to be replaced online Record the following data in advance since the data may not be correctly saved after module failure When data saving is not available and the above data has not been recorded two point calibration must be performed again by using an
96. 24 Count average processing o ooo 83 Count average setting Un G2 127 Decimal point position Un G59 139 Default setting registration Un G48 135 Default setting registration command UniG 148 A a a Sy ce eae 150 Default setting registration function 107 Default value writing completion flag Un G149 151 Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 ETE SE EFE oe Bala We ce ace te ae ive oe wees One 142 Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 146 Digital output Zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 A E rr AS a a 142 ERR LED 0er ace bot a bed bee 155 Error clear request YF oo 117 EMOrCOde List xro aida a 225 Erortag XE is tod a ia Shh hee ws 117 Error history amp sq Error code Un G1800 to Un G1999 O cece ah od 1G 22 152 Error occurrence time Un G191 to Un G194 Un G1791 O UMG IIA 34643 A ehce st Seen ate 151 External Dimensions ooooooo o 285 External WII Gis cs ci a 157 286 GIP OGLOAD ueensdrrcistisscalmial 240 242 G PEOGSTOR cuidad da ina alte a in 240 246 Gravitational acceleration correction function 56 Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit value setting H UMG xe sont de to ato a we 132 Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 A WER ae ache abe ak Seed 146 H W information 2 0000 e ee eee 239 Input signal e
97. 4 128 Stable status time setting Un G5 128 Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 140 T Tare zero offset Un G54 o 137 Tare zero offset function o 51 Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 145 Terminal block o o ooooo ee eee ees 155 TROUBLESHOOTING 2000 225 Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 149 Two point calibration functi0N 60 Two point calibration method setting Un G41 133 Two point calibration mode status flag XA 115 Two point calibration mode switch request YA 115 Two point calibration request Un G43 134 Two point calibration setting Un G40 132 Two point calibration setting Un G42 133 Two point calibration setting completion flag X7 O A A A ET 112 Two point calibration setting request Y7 112 Two point Calibration when a Sequence Program is WSO A a cli a a dieting tone heed a 252 Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 A fe Gla wae B aN hk NI 146 Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 A O EE EE EE 145 U UniIt UMGBO eaaa sraa car ds 139 2817 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover May 2009 SH NA 080821ENG A First edition SAFETY PRECAUTION GENERIC TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS Section 2 1 3 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 1 3 4 2 to 3 4 4 3 4 10 3 4 13 3 5 3 3 5 6 3 5
98. 4 MITSUBISHI W a ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MEL SEC erie Load Cell Input Module User s Manual Q61LD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels A WARNING and N CAUTION NWARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions NCAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under A CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING O Do not write any data to the system area of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the programm
99. 7 Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 This setting is used to specify whether to stop operation or restore automatically when the following status occurs in normal mode e An analog input load cell output exceeds the conversion range e Weighing capacity over 1 is set to Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b1 bO b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bd b4 b3 b2 b1 2lolololololoiojolololololololo e a 0 Auto stop Data for b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 1 Auto restoration a Enabling the settings Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the settings b Default Auto stop 0 is set by default 8 Warning output setting Un G20 This setting is used to specify whether to output or stop warnings upper and lower limit alarms or input signal error detection warnings bO b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 ojo o o ojojo o ojo o ojo jo o o Data for b1 to b7 are fixed to 0 Data for b9 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Warning output enabled 1 Warning output disabled 0 Input signal error detection enabled 1 Input signal error detection disabled a Enabling the settings Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the settings b Default Warning output disabled 1 and Input signal error detection disable 1 are set by default 130 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 9 Input signal error detection setting
100. 8 4 1 4 5 4 8 to 4 10 5 4 1 5 5 2 6 1 to 6 3 7 4 1 7 5 8 1 Appendix 1 1 to 1 3 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Section 3 4 5 3 4 15 3 5 10 4 14 5 6 8 2 10 to 8 2 12 Appendix 2 February 2012 February 2012 H NA 080821ENG C Complete revision due to layout change of the manual Japanese manual version SH 080820 E This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 280 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the pro
101. 8 2 3 Perform two point zero calibration with nothing placed Okg on the weigh scale 57 Page 66 Section 4 8 2 4 Place the actual load counter weight that has been set to Standard weight setting on the weigh scale and perform two point span calibration gt Page 68 Section 4 8 2 5 NO Move the scale poyjau Bulnes z 8 p uonouny UO eJqIeo JUIOd OM 8Y YES Set the installation site 2 Page 57 Section 4 7 3 End 1 When executing the two point span calibration set in advance the weight of the actual load standard weight to be placed 2 If the installation site of the weighing machine is different from the calibration site set it again at the installation site For details on the gravitational acceleration correction function refer to the following e Gravitational Acceleration Correction Function 2_ gt Page 56 Section 4 7 61 2 When two point calibration has been performed once NO Perform two point calibration with the actual load NO YES Correct two point calibration Set two point setting value Correct two point calibration Set two point calibration value manually Set two point setting value Page 71 Section 4 8 2 6 Page 64 Section 4 8 2 3 Perform two point zero calibration with nothing placed Okg on the weigh scale gt Page 66 Section 4 8 2 4 Perform
102. 9 UONOUN JSSHO OJ9Z BIE Y p 4 7 Gravitational Acceleration Correction Function This function corrects weight errors due to any difference of gravitational acceleration that may be present if the weighing machine is to be calibrated at a site other than its installation site The setting is unnecessary if the calibration is to be performed at the installation site 1 Correction of gravitational acceleration If the value of gravitational acceleration can be found for the target locations the gravitational acceleration values at the two point calibration site and at the actual installation site can be set to correct the error The setting range of gravitational acceleration is 9 7000 to 9 9999 The timing of gravitational acceleration setting in relation to the two point calibration must be as follows e Before performing two point calibration set the gravitational acceleration value of the calibration target site to Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 When the two point span calibration is performed the value set in Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 is automatically stored in Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 e If the installation site of the scale is different from the calibration site set Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 value after the two point calibration has been completed e If two point calibration is performed again aft
103. 9 7000 to 9 9999 Acceleration 4 Normally the standard weight for performing the two point calibration must be set to the same value as the maximum weighing capacity setting value 4 Two point zero calibration Use the Scale Initial Setting window for the setting 1 Select the module to be used and click the Module Selection Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting X Module Selection XO Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Analog Module gt Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting Cancel 2 Click the button Two Point Calibration Setting 0000 Q61LD Set two point calibration setting When you use the scale for the first time or scale installation site has been changed please specify the scale initial setting Without the Scale Initial Setting the following settings cannot work appropriately When scale installation site was changed from the site where the two point calibration was performed gravitational acceleration needs to be corrected Please set the installation site Installation Site Setting When correcting the two point calibration setting values please set the scale correction setting Scale Correction Setting Close y Continued to the next page 66 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION Continued y 3 With nothing placed on the weighing machine 0kg except for the fixed tare click the Before executing the following pro
104. 91 b15 b12b11 b8 b7 b4b3 b0 Example Year 2009 2009H b15 b12b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0 Example Un G192 Un G1792 July 31st 10731H Month Day b15 b12b11 b8b7 b4b3 b0 Example 10 35 Un G193 Un G1793 Un G194 Un G1794 b15 b12b11 Minute b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 1035H Example 30 seconds Friday A Second FE 3005H Day Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday DOD N e2 0o N O Friday Saturday 151 sjiejoq eyeq Bumes z 9 47 Error historyOJError code Un G1800 to Un G1999 Up to 40 errors that occurred in the Q61LD are recorded b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1800 Un G1801 Last two digits of the year Un G1802 Day Un G1803 Minute Un G1804 Day of the week The history of up to 40 errors including those related to the channel errors stored in areas from Un G190 to Un G194 and those unrelated to the channel errors stored in areas from Un G1790 to Un G1794 are stored in chronological order In addition latest error information is stored in areas from Un G1800 to Un G1804 and the oldest error information is stored in areas from Un G1995 to Un G1999 152 CHAPTER 7 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION C
105. Correction Setting Close 3 Selecta value from the pull down menu to set Scale Initial Setting 0000 Q61LD Minimum Division and click the 1 Set a condition to execute two point zero span calibration Current Setting Value of Q61LD button Load cell Setting Yalue 10000 3 0mv Item Rated Capacity Rated Output Number of load cells in connection Scale Setting uonoun4 uopoajeg ajeos y 1 julog Jajuag Ypy Item Zero Offset Maximum Weighing Capacity Setting 10000 Explanation Set a minimum division of gross weight output value 1 2 5 10 2050 y Continued to the next page 103 Continued y 4 Click the button MELSOFT Series GX Works a 5 Reflection of the condition is completed MELSOFT Series GX Works x EEE 104 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 1 5 Stable Status This function checks if Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is stable or not Stable status X1 turns on when the following condition is satisfied e The range of variation of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is continuously within the range specified by Stable status range setting Un G4 for the duration defined by Stable status time setting Un G5 or longer This function is convenient for such applications as constant amount control where the stability of the weighing machine is to be checked before starting and
106. Empty Empty 16Point 0060 Legend 7 Empty Empty 16Point Power Base slots Installed Base Supply Type a Status Modules Slot Fas Model Name Point Base Module Base Model Name ES Error Oo Major Error A Moderate Error Minor Error O Assignment Error 8 Assignment Incorrect Module Changing Stop Monitor Print Product Information List 2 Module s Detailed Information of the Q61LD is displayed Module s Detailed Information Monitor Status Module Model Name Q61LD I O Address 000 Mount Position Main Base 0 Slot Product Information 120920000000000 C Production Number Monitoring Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Fuse Blown Status L Status of I O Address Verify Agree I O Clear Hold Setting Noise Filter Setting Input Type Remote Password Setting Status E Error Information Error and Solutior Latest Error Code Update Error History 0002 z Contents lear Error Histor Emo Tae eer Code Display Format HEX DEC mold error T phe bottom line Stop Monitor b Checking with Latest error code Un G190 UniG 1790 The following shows how to check Latest Error Code Un G1790 for errors W Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch EN Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device
107. FUNCTION 3 In the case of two point calibration mode In this mode only the conversion over status indication will be operational Regardless of the status of Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 the conversion process will not stop even with the Conversion over 1 status of Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b3 Exceeded conversion Gross weight output value So Exceeded conversion ae clear Conversion range Weighing capacity over Weighing capacity over clear Maximum weighing capacity set value 10 divisions input signal error clear Input signal error detection setting Maximum weighing capacity setting Conversion enable disable setting Un GO Conversion enable 0 Error flag XF Conversion completion flag Un G113 Conversion completed 1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b3 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b1 Input signal error detection flag Pp Un G114 b2 Input signal error detection signal XC eran Bunyes uo eJ0 59 D1 EWOINE JOAO UOISJOAUOD JO SNJe s ayy Ag JOE euBis indu uodn uonelado 121 p Error clear request YF Point Conversion over 1 or errors error code 99 may be caused by a number of factors including disconnection of load cell connection cables wrong wiring wrong parameter settings and module failures uoouny uo 0ajeg 101143 eubis indu Zt 99 4 13 Warning Output Function Whe
108. HAPTER 7 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION This chapter describes the procedures and wirings for connecting the Q61LD to the system 1 1 Handling Precautions e Do not drop or apply excessive shock to the enclosure of the main unit e Do not remove the printed circuit board of the module from the enclosure It may cause a failure e Pay attention to prevent foreign matters such as chips of metal or wire from entering the module It can cause fire failure or malfunction e A protective film is attached on top of the module to prevent foreign matters such as wire or metal chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove the film before operating the system for not to prevent heat dissipation e Tighten the module fixing and other screws with the tightening torque range specified in the following table Screw location Tightening torque range Module fixing screw M3 0 36 to 0 48N m Terminal block terminal screw M3 0 42 to 0 58N m Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 0 66 to 0 89N m 4 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module fixing screw if the module is subject to significant vibration e To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base uni
109. Jl K5 K1 HO K45 D1045 K1 M280 M281 gt Tl SE D1045 1 W36 1 __ RST ZP REMTO J1 K5 K1 HO K45 D1045 K1 M290 M291 IN e E M292 W36 1 RST M280 M281 _ RST M290 M291 mH MCR M262 M272 D1045 1 Zero reset request ON M280 M282 D1045 1 Zero reset completion M290 Zero reset request OFF M292 M282 M292 NO w CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 8 Program example without using intelligent function module parameters a Checking the operating status of remote I O station SB47 H K4 bt _ _ T 100 Master station baton pass status check SB49 H K3 J _ S S T1071 Master station data link status check SW70 0 H K4 l 102 Remote I O station baton pass status check SW74 0 H K3 l l a 1 103 Remote l O station data link status check SW78 0 H K3 l a G 104 Remote l O station parameter communication status check SB20 RST M103 T100 T101 T102 T103 T104 SB20 T100 T101 T102 T103 T104 MC NO M100 Master module status check M103 SET M101 X2C X1000 X1009 Y1009 4 PLS M102 M101 RST M101 SET M103 RST M104 YIOMION O I 3J0UW3Y JO HuluswesHOlg 6 183 184 b Initial setting for reading a gross weight output value M102 MOV HO D1000 MOV H5 D1001 MOV K10 D1002 MOV K16 D1003 MOV K2 D1004 MOV K10 D1005 MOV K2 D1006 MOV K100 D1007 M103 x1000 X1009 Y1009 M102 k _ __ O KO gt TIZP REMTO ji K1 K1 HO KO D1000 K8 M210 M2
110. Kaiia 4 5 Setting Load Cell Specifications Set Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 Load cell rated output Un G52 and Number of load cells in connection Un G53 to be used for the weighing machine When setting under the following conditions e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 250kg e Load cell rated output Un G52 2 0mV V e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 4 e Decimal point position Un G59 10 e Unit Un G60 1kg 1 Setting method Use the Scale Initial Setting window for the setting 1 Select the module to use the tare zero offset Module Selection Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting X Module Selection function and click the button Start Y Address Module Type o000 O61LD Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Analog Module gt Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting uonsuny a qesig a qeuyg UOISISAUOD y py Cancel y Continued to the next page 49 Continued y 2 Click the Scale initial Setting button Two Point Calibration Setting O000 061LD 3 Set Rated Capacity to 250 Rated Output to 2 0mV V and Number of load cells in connection to 4 ie 4 Click the Se button a Rated Output 2Omwy Scale Initial Setting 0000 Q61LD tem Setting Value Installation Site Gravitational Acceleration 9 80676 5 Click the es button MELSOFT Series GX Works 6 The setting is complete MELSOFT
111. PA MEA End 512 0000 oir 256 1000 10FF Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Network Range Assignment button 5 gt Switch Screens gt XY Setting a Network Parameter Assignment the MNET 10 H Remote Station Network Range Module No 1 Setup common parameters and 1 0 assignments 4ssignment Method Monitoring Ti 200 10m PO Points Start AI Parameter Name Total 5l fe Start End ea Switch Screens E Setting M Station RA Station M Station lt A Station Station No Start End Points End Start 256 1000 10FF 4 Open the Refresh Parameters setting window and set the following X Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt Refresh Parameters button 4 Network Parameter MNET 10H Refresh Parameter Module No 1 Assignment Method Transient Transmission Error History Status f Points Start e Overwrite f Hold Start End Uk Side PLC Side ei ae se gt sl oo irr nooo sw siaj ooo0 or sw sta o oe gt INN a YIOMION O I 3J0UW3Y JO HuluswesBOld 6 Transfer Lw S192 000 1FFF Transfers e poo po u gt MD Default Check End Cancel w f esef ooo t i T Transfert he e a ono Fer Beo am 00m E 177 5 Write the set parameters to the CPU module of the master station Then reset
112. Q61LD with Redundant CPU o oooo oooooooono o 21 2 3 Checking the Function Version and Serial Number ooo oooooooooooooo 22 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 24 3 1 Performance Specifications ooooooooonona eee eens 25 3 141 Conversion Characteristics oer eos Sees tAok de ge erodes AA Seated ous 2 Slee ACCULACY arra ate oeiiate nen ra OA 30 3 1 3 Number of parameters iii car aeitad pero nt badd date 31 32 e sch ceotectahsidd hectidcmesasd dee Seams ad tod Soe Se eeeee bu E 32 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 34 4 1 General Characteristics of Load Cells 0 00 0 ccc ccc eee eee ene nas 34 4 2 Fixed Tare Gross Weight and Net Weight 0 0c ee eee 37 4 3 Operation of Gross Weight Output Value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital Output Value ACI E alv al ones tetas tee ads hin aaa abris EE ee io 39 4 3 1 When the tare zero offset function is not Used 2 eee 40 4 3 2 When the tare zero offset function is used 2 tenes 44 4 4 Conversion Enable Disable Function 0 0 0 anaana anaana ananena 49 4 5 Setting Load Cell Specifications 2 0 0 0 000s 49 AG are Zero Ofset FUNCION te ele AG ee Bimal ee 51 4 7 Gravitational Acceleration Correction Function 0 0 00 ccc eee eee 56 4 8 Two point Calibration Function 0 0 000000 eee eens 60 4 8 1 Precautions for two point calibration 0 0 0 0 000 eee een 60 A92 Selma melodrama oe 61 4 8 3 Calculation of gross weight output va
113. S Appendix 5 2 Execution condition of online module change To change a module online the following CPU module MELSECNET H remote I O module Q61LD GX Developer and base unit are required Online module change is available on the Q61LD from the first product 1 CPU module Use a process CPU or Redundant CPU For precautions on the multiple CPU system configuration refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System For precautions on the redundant system configuration refer to the following QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System 2 MELSECNET H remote I O module Use the module of function version D or later 3 GX Developer Use GX Developer Version 7 10L or later User GX Developer Version 8 17T or later to change a module on a remote I O station online 4 Base unit e When the slim type main base unit Q3 O SB is used online module change cannot be performed e When an extension base unit that requires no power supply module Q5 O B is used all modules mounted on the base unit cannot be changed online aBueyd sjnpoW suluo JO UOIIPUOD UOIINDeXy Z s xipueddy pasn si Jadojarnag X5 u yM BHueyyD sinpoyy suuo G xipueddy 269 Appendix 5 3 Operation during online module change This section describes the operation during online module change O Executed x Not executed Operation of the CPU module Operation of the Q61LD X Y 1 Stop the operation Turn off all the Y sign
114. SHOOTING L_ gt Page 225 CHAPTER 11 Two points calibration mode status flag XA Two points calibration method setting Un G41 Automatic setting 0 ee ezo 0 Two points zero calibration enabled 1 Two points calibration Two points zero calibration request Un G43 b0 aS requested 1 Two points zero calibration E X value Un G84 Un G85 l Two points calibration BNO OoOo T completion flag Un G143 b0 Gee a gt Executed by the Q61LD SOE xeccuted in a sequence program APPENDICES Point O After setting Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 to Two point zero calibration requested 1 place nothing Okg on the weighing machine until Two point calibration completion flag Un1G 143 bO turns to Two point zero calibration completion 1 It may take a few seconds to complete two point zero calibration O When performing two point zero calibration with Tare zero offset Un G54 set to Used 0 and Two point calibration method setting Un G41 set to Automatic setting 0 set the values of Count average setting Un G2 and Moving average setting Un G3 to within the following ranges e When Averaging processing method setting Un G1 is Sampling processing 0 There is no limit e When Averaging processing method setting Un G1 is Count average 2 1000ms Count average setting x 10ms e When Averaging processing method setting Un G1 is Moving average 3 1000ms Moving average setting x 10ms e
115. SS Operating condition setting completion flag X9 Operating condition setting request Y 9 Conversion enable disable setting Un GO conversion enabled 0 Conversion completion G signal XE Executed in a sequence program ie Executed by the Q61LD CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS SENT TO FROM CPU MODULE 8 Two point calibration mode status flag XA Two point calibration mode switch request YA e Turn on Two point calibration mode switch request YA to change the following settings or to enable Two point calibration request Un G43 Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 Load cell rated output Un G52 Number of load cells in connection Un G53 Tare zero offset Un G54 Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 Decimal point position Un G59 Unit Un G60 Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 Digital output Zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 When Two point calibration mode switch request YA is turned on Two point calibration mode status
116. Series GX Works e CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 6 Tare Zero Offset Function This function expands the usable range of the load cell to effectively utilize the input range of the A D converter The usable range refers to the load cell output range from no load to the maximum weighing capacity as a weighing machine with fixed tare The load cell output corresponding to the fixed tare weight is offset by the fixed tare output value stored in the Q61LD Also Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 and A D converter gain setting Un G81 are automatically adjusted to their optimum values on condition that the load cell output at the maximum weighing capacity does not exceed about 86 6 of the conversion input range to the A D converter Operation image Instrumentation A D converter gain amplifier gain Zero offset output value While a load cell of which rated output is 3 0mV V or less may be connected to the Q61LD the input range available for conversion with no conversion over error depends on the combination of Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 and A D converter gain setting Un G81 Point When using the tare zero offset function do not use Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 The accuracy is not guaranteed O When using the tare zero offset function set Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 properly Page 52 Section 4 6 1 Ex When setting under the following c
117. T following parameters are automatically set e Calibration Site Gravitational Acceleration e Two Point Span Calibration Value Point Avoid any fluctuation of the actual load standard weight on the weighing machine until the two point span calibration is fully completed poyjau Bulnes z 8 p uonouny uoneqijen JUIOd OM gy 69 70 a When the actual load standard weight is smaller than the maximum weighing capacity setting value If the actual load standard weight is insufficient to provide the load corresponding to the maximum weighing capacity set for the system because of the structure of the scale or due to the unavailability of standard weights the calibration may be performed using an actual load of which weight mass is less In this case perform the calibration according to the following procedures e For Maximum Weighing Capacity Setting Value set the maximum weight the scale can actually weigh e For Standard Weight Setting set the weight of the standard weight to be used upon calibration However note that the accuracy will be degraded in proportion to the weight of the standard weight used for the calibration if it is smaller than the maximum weighing capacity setting value When the maximum weighing capacity of the weighing machine is 1000kg and the calibration weight of 600kg is used e Maximum Weighing Capacity Setting 1000 e Standard Weight Setting 600 By performing two point span calibr
118. Two point span calibration disable 0 is set to Two point calibration setting Un G42 b1 the setting of Two point calibration request Un G43 is ignored 16 Zero point adjustment request Un G45 This setting is used to correct a zero point that has been changed due to a temperature change foreign matter adherence on a weighing machine or other such reasons after two point calibration b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 Data for b2 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Zero set requested off 1 Zero set requested 0 Zero reset requested off 1 Zero reset requested a Default Zero set not requested 0 and Zero reset not requested 0 are set by default Point After completing a zero set or zero reset reset Zero set not requested 0 and Zero reset not requested 0 for Zero point adjustment request Un G45 134 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 17 Default setting registration Un G48 This setting is used to specify whether to enable or disable Default setting registration command Un G148 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 ofoJololoJolo olo olololofo ofo ee ee Data for b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Default setting registration disable 1 Default setting registration enable a Default Default setting registration disable 0 is set by default 18 Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 This setting is used to set a load cell rated capacity The setting range is 1 to 999999
119. UNCTION 4 11 Zero Set Reset Function This function uses the sequence program to adjust the zero point when the zero point has changed after two point calibration due to temperature change or any accretion on the scale Zero balance _ a A Zero balance amendment setting E amendment excess Zero set TT Zero point gross weight output value unperformed zero adjustment Zero reset gt Weight Zero adjustment request Un G45 b0 ON Zero set request 1 ON Zero set completion 1 Zero adjustment completion flag Un G145 b0 ON Zero balance amendment excess 1 Input signal error detection flag Input signal error detection signal XC Error clear request YF Zero reset request 1 Zero adjustment request Un G45 b1 Zero reset completion 1 Zero adjustment completion flag Un G145 b1 1 Zero set and zero reset a Zero set The sequence program is used to adjust the zero point Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is set to 0 UO IOUN JOS9Y 19S 0197 LLP b Zero reset The correction made by zero point adjustment is cleared to 0 and the zero value of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is reset to the value after the two point calibration value 89 90 2 Occurrence and clearing of Outside the zero point range a Occurrence of Outside the zero point range If zero set is performed while the amount of correction by zero poi
120. Un G21 This setting is used to set the value by which an analog input value error is detected The setting range is as follows a Setting range ratio against maximum weighing Description capacity setting value Input signal error detection setting O to 250 0 0 to 25 0 a Enabling the settings Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the settings b Default The default value is 50 5 0 Point O If Input signal error detection disable 1 is set to Warning output setting Un G20 b8 any value set in Input signal error detection setting Un G21 is ignored Values can be set in increments of 0 1 but is processed in units of Minimum division Un G58 rounded down at the minimum division O lfa value outside the setting range is written an error occurs and the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence 10 Zero point range setting Un G22 This setting is used to set the range in which zero point adjustment is automatically performed if the zero point has been changed due to reasons such as a temperature change and foreign matter adherence of a weighing machine after two point calibration Zero point range setting is required The setting range is as follows ae Setting range ratio against maximum weighing Description capacity setting value Zero po
121. V after amplification a conversion over error may result since the conversion range of the Q61LD is limited to 2 3mV V 45 pasn s UONOUNJ JOS JO OBZ 318 BU USYM Z p coran ZOLD UN anjea mdino e161q pue LOLON OOLS UN anjer mdino juBbiem SsO 5 jo vonelado ep a When fixed tare is removed When Tare zero offset Un G54 is used removing the fixed tare may result in conversion over This is because the input voltage to the A D converter becomes negative when the fixed tare is removed as it has been offset by the amount of the fixed tare weight the negative voltage is then amplified with A D converter gain Input value after zero offset mV V 0 6 0 0 0 3 0 6 2 4 0 6x4 a eee Zero offset No zero offset ___ ___ AE _ a Input value after multiplication mV V 2 309 0 C Gross weight output value x 10 kg lt 0 When the load on the load cell is completely eliminated by removing the fixed tare the zero offset output value 0 6mV V is multiplied by 4 in A D converter gain Although the converter input value exceeds the conversion range on the minus side 46 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION b Modified case 1 When Load cell rated output Un G52 shown in the example conditions is changed from 1 2mV V to 2 0mV V e The tare zero offset output value will increase If Load cell rated output Un G52 increases without the conversion range change the ZERO point will also increase
122. aaa O SET Y7 Two point setting request ON gt D O 5 Bo E 2 0 o 2 a C 8 S 2 y 0 S3 O o 3 C D O 259 260 X0 X0A Y7 X7 H RST Y7 UN MOV HO G40 X3 xoc XOE XOF Jp i X16 X0 XOA M40 M41 UO NAH m KH MOV HO G41 UO MOV H1 G42 UO SET G43 0 X0 X0A U0 G43 0 U0 G143 0 UO e ___ RST G43 0 UO MOV HO G42 SET M51 M50 RST M5 X17 M51 X0 XOA M40 M41 UO YH HA 1H MOV HO G41 U0 MOV H2 G42 U0 SET G43 1 X0 X0A U0 G43 1 U0 G143 1 UO e RST G43 1 UO MOV HO G42 XOF UO BCD G1800 K4Y20 XOF BCD KO K4Y20 X0C X19 YOF XOF END Point O Satisfy the following condition for setting If Two point setting request Y7 is turned on or off without satisfying the condition the values in the buffer memory areas are overwritten to the one before the change Standard Maximum weighing Load cell weight setting lt Capacity setting lt rated capacity x Un G62 Un G63 Un G56 Un G57 Un G50 Un G51 e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 Two point setting request OFF Two point setting Read Two point calibration interlock Two point calibration method setting Automatic setting Two point calibration setting Zero calibration Enable S
123. able controller CPU to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system Design Precautions CAUTION O Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions CAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw Tighten the screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in dam
124. actual load standard weight Refer to Save Restoration Setting List 2 7 Page 222 Section 10 9 It is recommended to perform an online module change in the actual system in advance to ensure that it would not affect the other modules by checking following Means of disconnection from external devices and its configuration are correctly implemented Turning relevant switches on and off will not adversely affect the system After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction Dedicated instructions cannot be executed during online module change When using dedicated instructions to execute save restoration execute it on another separate system If a separate system is unavailable perform restoration by writing relevant data to the buffer memory The accuracy after online module change is 3 times lower than the one before the change Perform two point calibration again as appropriate In case of sudden system failure it is advised to always make a substitute means available Even if the module is used in a remote l O station the save restoration must be performed with another system which is the one mounted in the main base unit Another system mounted in a remote l O station cannot perform the save restoration operation APPENDICE
125. age A E Installed Modules Parameter yo Base Module Base Model Name P Slots Status B3se i e Point Es Power Extension Basel Extension Base2 O Extension Base3 CPU Q QJ72LP25 25 CPU E A6Point Inteli 16Point Empty Empty 16Point 0010 Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty 16Point 0020 16Point 0030 16Point 0040 16Point 0050 16Point 0060 16Point 0070 Extension Base4 0 2 Extension Base5 Extension Base Extension Base Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty o Major Error A Moderate Error O Assignment Error Assignment Incorrec E Network No Master Point Address Station No PLC amp Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device Device Name Buffer Memory Module Start 0000 y HEX Address 50 y Dec y Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Address Modify Value Device Label Buffer Memory Device Label v7 Data Type Bit On Switch ON OFF m Sethable Range Execution Result lt Execution Result Data Type Bik Bit Word Signed Word Signed Bik Reflect to Input Column Delete Device Label 214 Click the button to close the System Monitor window Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor window online gt Monitor amp gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Display and select the buffer memory
126. age to the product A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant chapter in this manual Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions WARNING O After installation and wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Wiring Precautions CAUTION O Ground the FG terminal to the protective ground conductor dedicated to the programmable controller Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction O Tighten the terminal screw within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipa
127. ailable 204 10 See a a eu een a ee 210 10 8 When Parameters are Set by a Sequence Program When Another System is Unavailable 216 10 9 Save Restoration Setting List 0 0 0 0 eens 222 10 10 Correction Factor Calculating Method naaa aaan annaa 224 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 225 TAA EO OCeUcI shia net ete eee aoe ee steamboat ts aaa en ee abad 225 12 Troubleshoo lO stud da aie ab ae ete aia cis 235 1121 When he RUN CED turns Off sche a de oath aa Ge td Ae ota le 235 11 2 2 When the RUN LED flashes 0 0 00 ccc eens 235 11 23 When the ERR LED flashes ci adhd adie eons Sue ea as aa 235 11 2 4 When the ERR LED turns on 0 0 00 cette ene nee 235 11 2 5 When the ALM LED flashes ocurra taa iia ad o 236 1126 When the ALM LED tums OM ews 4 25 ts dankcnats nidri ius ai E OR 236 11 2 7 When Input signal error detection signal XC turns ON 1 0 0 0 00 ce eee eee eee 236 11 2 8 When a measured weight value cannot be read 2 eee 236 11 2 9 When a measured weight value is abnormal n oauan nnana ccc ee eee 237 11 2 10 When the two point zero calibration is completed abnormally 238 11 2 11 When the two point span calibration is completed abnormally 238 11 2 12 When the default setting registration is completed abnormally 238 11 2 13 Checking the Q61LD status using system monitor of GX Works2 239
128. als turned on by The module is normally O the sequence program operating 2 Remove the module User operation FROM TO Dedicated Device The operation of the module Start the online module change has stopped using GX Works2 The RUN LED turns off Conversion disabled Click the GX Works2 to enable t he module to be removed Remove the selected module 3 Mount a new module Mount a new module The X Y refresh restarts and the module starts up The RUN LED turns on Default operation After mounting the module ae READY X0 stays x x x i button on Works2 off When there are initial setting parameters the module starts to operate based on the initial setting parameters at this point Check the operation before the control starts 4 Check the operation Click the _ Cance button on GX Works2 to turn off the online mode On Device test on GX Works2 test the operation of the module The module operates based on the test operation Operation check is completed 5 Restart the control Module READY X0 turns on Restart the online module change using GX Works2 Click the a The module ae based on the initial setting sequence program started when Module READY X0 is started button to restart the control 4 Includes access to the intelligent function module device UD GD 2 In the absence of the operation marked 2 the intelligent function module
129. alue corresponding to the upper limit of the conversion range The actual digital output value will be clamped at 10751 2 Substitute 1 0mV V 2 0mV V or 3 0mV V for the setting value of Op 14 or 244 respectively Ex When Load cell rated output Un G50 Un G51 is set to 1 2mV V and the system is loaded with the fixed tare and if Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 is 5213 5213 11547 x 1 2 2 0 x 65535 17752 Accordingly set Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 to 17752 04 IV CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION d Setting range of the parameters related to two point calibration Set so that the conversion range is not exceeded when the input voltage is multiplied by Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 and A D converter gain setting Un G81 values The equation is as follows Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Rated output Un G52 a A D converter gain setting x gt 0 5 ae ee Un G81 Rated capacities x Connection numbers Instrumentation amplifier gain setting U G50 Un G51 Un G53 Un G80 3 Select a gain value from j 2 The rate of the convertible range which 1 The rate against the load cell rated output g 1 2 48 16 and 32 corresponds to the load cell rated output When setting under the following conditions e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 3000 300 0kg e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 4 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57
130. alues are stored e Each gross weight output value is represented in 32 bit signed binary e Gross weight output values are analog input data load cell output represented in weight values 32 bit signed binary by the following settings Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 Load cell rated output Un G52 Number of load cells in connection Un G53 Tare zero offset Un G54 Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 Decimal point position Un G59 Unit Un G60 Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 Digital output Zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 A D converter gain setting Un G81 Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 36 Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 e Conversion values 0 to 10000 are stored for Load cell output 0 mV V to Load cell rated output Un G52 e Each digital output value is represented in 32 bit signed binary e This setting is valid while the Q61LD runs with Tare zero offset Un G54 set to Not used 1 2 gt Page 27 Section 3 1 1 146 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 37 Maximum gross weight output value Un G104 U
131. ameter List Intelligent Function Module Parameter List Intelligent Function Module Parameter Setting Status sY Address Module Mame Initialization Count Auto Refresh Counti 0000 QILE el Setting Exist 3 Ml Setting Exist 14 Intelligent Function Module Parameter Setting Count Total Initial Auto Refresh Max 2045 E Close 1 2 3 sJa aweJed jo Jaquinn EVE suonesiinads asoueuoJag No Description 1 The total number of initial setting parameters checked in the window 2 The maximum number of initial setting parameters allowed to be set 3 The total number of auto refresh setting parameters checked in the window 4 The maximum number of auto refresh setting parameters allowed to be set 31 3 2 Function List This section lists the functions of the Q61LD Function Description Reference Conversion Page 49 Enables or disables the conversion enable disable function Section 4 4 e Offsets the load cell output voltage that corresponds to the fixed tare weight to make it suitable to the input condition and to improve the accuracy 2 T a Automatically offsets the fixed tare weight part of the load cell output voltage and sets Page 51 AI UNENON Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 and A D converter gain setting Un G81 to Section 4 6 their optimal values while keeping the maximum weighing capacity setting within the input range Corrects weight error due to any differe
132. an electric signal A load cell is also referred to as a load transducer When a load is applied to a load cell the load cell converts the load into an electric signal and outputs the signal A wiring method to stabilize a voltage applied to a load cell An applied voltage varies depending on the resistance of a cable that changes according to temperature change By connecting six cables to a load cell on the side where a voltage is applied the applied voltage is stabilized A wiring method to proportion variation in a load cell input signal to variation in the reference voltage of an A D converter An error is minimized by using the same power supply for the reference voltage and for a voltage applied to the load cell The maximum load that can be applied to a load cell Tare weight is included A digital value converted from an analog signal load cell output voltage that is input to a programmable controller as an output value A numeric value 0 to 10000 converted from an A D conversion output value according to a resolution 1 10000FS An A D conversion output value after two point calibration and tare zero offset are performed A device used to extend connection cables to a load cell A device required when multiple load cells are used Output signals from multiple load cells connected in parallel are summed to form a single output Gain variation caused by temperature change Zero point variation caused by temperature c
133. ance and the relative ratio must be equal among the resistors For proper selection please consult with the manufacturer of the load cell The averaging resistors R are not required if the load cell output voltages have been adjusted assuming parallel connection Point Multiple load cells used require the same specifications Multiple load cells connected in parallel can be regarded as a single load cell of which rated capacity is n times the capacity of each cell where n is the number of identical load cells connected in parallel 158 CHAPTER 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS CHAPTER 8 various SETTINGS This chapter describes the procedures of various settings 8 1 Adding Modules This section describes how to add the Q61LD to be used in a project 1 How to add a new module The necessary settings are to be made in the New Module window Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt New Module New Module Module Selection Module Type Analog Module Module Mame QILD Mount Position Mounted Slot Mo 0 Acknowledge I O Assignment i Specify start Y address 0000 Hi 1 5lot Occupy 16 points Title Setting Title 0 gt o Q ma _ E lt O o g Description Module Type Select Analog Module Module Selection Module Name Select Q61LD Base No Specify the base number to which the target module is to be mounted Mounted Slot No Specify the slot nu
134. and the information on errors that occur refer to the following e Minimum division Un G58 lt gt Page 138 Section 6 2 23 139 26 Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 This setting is used to set the standard weight to be put on the load cell when two point span calibration is requested by Two point calibration request Un G43 Usually as much standard weight as specified by Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 is put on the load cell to perform two point span calibration The setting range is 1 to 99999 32 bit signed binary a Default The default value is 10000 Point O Satisfy the following conditions e A value within the setting range e Standard weight setting lt Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 lt Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 x Number of load cells in connection Un G53 O lf the value that has been set fails to satisfy the conditions the following status occurs e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence O f an error occurs the setting becomes invalid and the value that has been in the buffer memory is reset to the original value before the setting request was issued 27 Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 This setting is used to set the gravitational acceleration at the installation site The setting corre
135. ange Operation Target Module Module Change WO Address 0000 Execution B1LO vi Installation Module Name M Confirmation Status Module Contral Changing Module Restart Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the next button after installing a new module Cancel CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Mount the removed module and a new module to another separate system Use the G P OGLOAD instruction to save the setting data to the CPU device For details on the G P OGLOAD instruction refer to gt Page 242 Appendix 1 1 For details on the target buffer memory refer to Save Restoration Setting List gt Page 222 Section 10 9 Use the G P OGSTOR instruction to restore the data set by the user For details on the G P OGSTOR instruction refer to gt Page 246 Appendix 1 2 Remove the new module from the separate system and insert it into the same slot where the original module was mounted Then mount the terminal block Mount the new module to the same slot and connect external wires as appropriate After the module is secured in place click the i button and check that the RUN LED turns on Module ready X0 remains off 207 a qe 1eny si uaj s s JoujouY u yM WesboJY ssuanbas e Aq Je s1aJolueJeg U YUM 90L 4 Checking the operation 1 Online Module Change MELSOFT Application i System Monitor 16Point 16Point 16P
136. ange in Mode and double click the module to be changed online Click the i button to make the module replaceable If the following error window is displayed the target buffer memory data cannot be saved for backup For details on the target buffer memory refer to Save Restoration Setting List 2 gt Page 222 Section 10 9 MELSOFT Application YD The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation Click the K button and perform the operation in gt Page 213 Section 10 7 3 After checking that the RUN LED of the module is off remove external connections and remove the module Always remove the module If installation confirmation is executed without actually removing the module the module will not start normally and the RUN LED will not turn on 212 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 3 Mounting a new module 1 Mount the new module to the same slot and connect Online Module Change f external wires Operation Target Module 2 Module Change 1 0 Address o000 After the module is secured in place click the Execution lL T Module Name 4 Confirmation Execute button and check that the RUN Status Module Control TE LED turns on Module ready X0 remains off Restart Shatusfouidance The module can be exchanged Please press the next button after installing a new module o Execute a Cancel 4
137. ata in advance since the data may not be correctly saved after module failure If the data in the module is lost and no external record is available two point calibration must be performed again using an actual load standard weight Refer to Save Restoration Setting List lt _ gt Page 222 Section 10 9 It is recommended to perform an online module change in the actual system in advance to ensure that it would not affect the other modules by checking following e Means of disconnection from external devices and its configuration are correctly implemented e Turning relevant switches on and off will not adversely affect the system e After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 50 times may cause malfunction e Dedicated instructions cannot be executed during online module change When using dedicated instructions to execute save restoration execute it on another separate system If a separate system is unavailable perform restoration by writing relevant data to the buffer memory e The accuracy after online module change is 3 times lower than the one before the change Perform two point calibration again as appropriate e In case of sudden system failure it is advised to always make a substitute means available Even if the module is used in a remote I O station the
138. ated by the Q61LD 1 Method for checking error codes The error codes generated by the Q61LD can be checked by the following methods Use these methods according to the purpose and application e Checking with Module s Detailed Information 2 gt Page 226 Section 11 1 1 a e Checking with Latest Error Code Un G190 Un G1790 2 gt Page 226 Section 11 1 1 b js POD 10113 bb 225 a Checking with Module s Detailed Information The following shows how to check Module s Detailed Information for errors Diagnostics gt System Monitor 1 Select Q61LD from Main Block and click the System Monitor m Monitor Status Connection Channel List i Monitoring Serial Port NET 10 H Remote Module Connection RS 232C System Image Detailed Information button m Mode System Monitor Online Module Change Main Base Operation to Selected Module Main Base Slot Q61LD tioni H W Information Diagnostics rror Histor Main Base Information List Module Information List Main Base Parameter NO Network No Master Type Point Station No PLC Power Powar Extension Basel QI72LP25 25 Extension Base2 E com Extension Base3 0 1 Empty Empty 16Point 0010 Extension Base4 Empty Empty 16Point 0020 Extension BaseS Empty Empty 16Point 0030 Extension Base Empty Empty 16Point 0040 Extension Base Empty Empty 16Point 0050
139. ating condition setting command OFF Operating condition setting request OFF 171 uonenbyuo5 wa s s JEWION ul BuluuwesBOld 26 b Reading a gross weight output value XO XOA M40 X3 X0E M1 UO DMOV G100 D4 DMOV K5 D14 D lt D4 D14 gt M2 M1 X1 f M8 x2 HHD Ko D4 y M9 XIA XOF M1 UN YY Y 222222222 SET 6500 U0 G45 0 U0 G145 0 UN H RST G45 0 X0C M1 X1B XOF M1 UN Y l AAMMMMIA lt lt lt lt lt lt LL SET 511 U0 G45 1 U0 G145 1 UN m RST G45 1 M1 X0C U0 G114 0 AM U0 G114 1 _ _ _ a _ _____ _ M4 U0 G114 2 es 1 U0 G114 3 12 X8 U0 G115 0 bb U0NG115 1 m7 XOF UO BCD G1800 K4Y20 XOF BCD KO K4Y20 X0C X19 YOF XOF END Gross weight output conversion in processing Gross weight output value Near zero point setting Near zero point Safety status output Center point detection Zero set request ON Zero set request OFF Zero reset request ON Zero reset request OFF Outside the zero point range An alarm is output even when Warning output setting is configured to be disabled Excess of weighing capacity An alarm is output even when Warning output setting is configured to be disabled Input signal error detection Excess of input values to be converted Gross weight upper limit Gross weight lower limit Output an error code in BCD Error code output OFF Error clear request ON For details on how to calculat
140. ation request Un G43 b0 to Two point calibration zero calibration requested 1 11 2 11 When the two point span calibration is completed abnormally Check item Is Two point calibration request Un G43 b1 set to Two point span calibration requested 1 in the normal mode Or is Two point calibration request Un G43 b1 set to Two point span calibration requested 1 with Two point calibration setting Un G42 b1 not set to Two point span calibration enable 1 Corrective action Set Two point calibration request Un G43 b1 to Two point span calibration requested 1 in the two point calibration mode Or set Two point calibration setting Un G42 b1 to Two point span calibration enable 1 and set Two point calibration request Un G43 b1 to Two point calibration span calibration requested 1 11 2 12 When the default setting registration is completed abnormally Check item Is Default setting registration command Un G148 set to Default setting registration command 1 in the normal mode Or is Default setting registration command Un G148 set to Default setting registration command 1 with Default setting registration Un G48 not set to Default setting registration enable 1 238 Corrective action Set Default setting registration command Un G148 to Default setting registration command 1 in the two point calibration mode Or set Default setting registration Un G48 to Default setting registration enab
141. ation with an actual load standard weight of 600kg on the weighing machine the system can be used as a weighing machine of which the maximum weighing capacity is 1000kg CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 6 Scale correction setting This section explains the procedures to correct the two point calibration value 1 Select the module to apply correction and click the Module Selection Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting X Module Selection Start XY Address l l pr Q61LD ernie O Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Analog Module gt Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting Cancel 2 Click the button Two Point Calibration Setting 0000 Q61LD Set two point calibration setting When you use the scale for the first time or scale installation site has been changed please specify the scale initial setting Scale Initial Setting Without the Scale Initial Setting the following settings cannot work appropriately When scale installation site was changed from the site where the two point calibration was performed gravitational acceleration needs to be corrected Please set the installation site Installation Site Setting When correcting the two point calibration setting values please set the scale correction setting poyjau Bulnes z 8 p uonouny UOH euqijeD julod om gp 3 Enter appropriate values in the items to be Scale Correction Setting 0000 Q61LD corre
142. automatic restoration setting Usable later than product is set to 1 Auto Restoration When the analog input load cell output is within the conversion range again the following status will result e Input signal error detection flag Un1G 114 b3 is reset to Normal 0 e Input signal error detection signal XC turns off e The ALM LED turns off The conversion of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 continues Ex 2 When conversion over occurs in the two point calibration mode After returning the analog input load cell output to within the conversion range turn on and off Error clear request YF e Input signal error detection flag Un1G 114 b3 is reset to Normal 0 e Input signal error detection signal XC turns off e The ALM LED turns off uoiouny uo 0ajeg 10143 eubis indu Zt Point If an error error code 99 occurs the conversion processing resumes by turning on and off Error clear request YF after the analog input load cell output is returned to within the conversion range If the conversion process does not resume take a proper action by referring to the following Error Code List gt Page 225 Section 11 1 93 94 5 Setting method a Input signal error 1 Set Warning output setting input signal error detection to 0 Input signal error detection enable DO Project window gt Intelligent Function Module
143. ay differ from that on the rating plate and on the front of the module O The serial number shown on the rating plate and on the front of the module is part of management information of the product O The serial number shown on the Product Information List window represents functional information of the product The functional information of the product will be updated when a function is added 23 JaquinN eUes pue uolsjan uonouny ay Buiyoayo ez CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes the performance specifications function list I O signals list and list of buffer memory areas 24 3 1 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Performance Specifications The following table shows the performance specifications for the Q61LD Item Analog input load cell output points Analog input load cell output Load cell applied voltage Digital output Gross weight output maximum weighing capacity output value ZERO point adjustment range Gain adjustment range Analog input range load cell rated output I O characteristics maximum resolution Accuracy accuracy relative to analog input load cell rated output of a module Sampling cycle Response time Absolute maximum input Number of writes to non volatile memory FeRAM Insulation method Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance Number of occupied I O points External connection system Applicable wire size Applicable solderless ter
144. b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Data for b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 Lo Registration command OFF 1 Default setting registration command When the default setting registration is completed Default value writing completion flag Un G149 bO turns to Default value writing completion 1 Set Default setting registration command UniG 148 back to Registration command Off 0 For the buffer memory addresses that are set back to the default values refer to the following e Buffer Memory List gt Page 118 Section 6 1 a Default Registration command Off 0 is set by default Point O After Default setting registration command 1 is set the original set value cannot be restored O After Default setting registration command 1 is set two point calibration must be performed Calibration values if recorded can be written from the sequence program O After default setting value writing is completed Default setting registration Un G48 returns to Default setting registration disable 0 O While a default setting registration command is in progress Two point setting request Y7 Operating condition setting request Y9 and Two point calibration request Un G43 must not be executed Otherwise an error occurs 150 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 45 Default value writing completion flag Un G149 The status of default value writing can be checked b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 0 Off 1
145. be calculated Net weight Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 Tare 3 When fixed tare is frequently changed When it is necessary to frequently change the measuring container tare if the two point zero calibration is performed each time the measuring container is changed while regarding the measuring container as fixed tare it may result in the following problems e The two point zero calibration takes time e When Tare zero offset Un G54 is set to Used 0 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b3 can be set to Conversion over 1 when the measuring container is removed e If a large fixed tare is used it can unintentionally exceed the rated capacity of the load cell To prevent the above listed problems from occurring it is advised to manually calculate the net weight if the measuring container has to be frequently changed 38 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 3 Operation of Gross Weight Output Value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital Output Value Un G102 Un G103 This section describes the operation of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 for the cases when the tare zero offset function is used and not used For details on the tare zero offset function refer to the following e Tare Zero Offset Function 2 gt Page 51 Section 4 6 coran ZOLD UN anjea mdino jesa pue LOLS UN OOLS UN anjer mdino juBbiem ssolo jo vonelado ep 39 4 3 1 Whe
146. ble disable setting Un GO e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 Two point calibration method setting Un G41 is set to Automatic setting 0 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 Tare zero offset Un G54 is set to Not used 1 s Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Conversion enable disable setting Un GO e Averaging processing method setting Un G1 e Count average setting Un G2 e Moving average setting Un G3 e Stable status range setting Un G4 e Stable status time setting Un G5 e Zero tracking range setting Un G6 e Zero tracking time setting Un G7 e Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 e Warning output setting Un G20 Settings that do not satisfy the following conditions in the case of two point calibration by automatic setting e Input signal error detection setting Un G21 Maximum weighing Load cell rated capacity Number of load cells capacity setting lt x in connection j j E Un G50 Un G51 e Zero point range setting Un G22 Standard weight setting Un G62 n G63 e Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit value setting H Un G31 e Two point setting Un G40 e Tw
147. cancelled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again System Monitor r Installed status m Base Base Modul O fe et tt eam E MasterPLC gt Main base Extension base 2 Extension base 4 Powe Uno Unio Unmo Unmoj Unmo Unmo Unmol rsu unti funti funti funti funti funti unti pply ng jng jng ng jng jng QO6PHCPU BERR m Parameter status r Mode A o a 2 3 4 5 6 Online module change None None None None None None None rsu QO6BPHCPU pply 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt y Status Module system error g Module error O Module warning O Module change Continued to the next page To check the operation click the to cancel the restart Click the module change mode Click the System Monitor window APPENDICES button to suspend the Online button to close the 281 3 qe lene ou s wua s s Jayjoue u yM 9 G xipuaddy pasn si Jadojarnag X5 u yM eBueyo sinpoyy suuo G xipueddy Continued y Device test Bit device Device E FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force ford device buffer memory Device pe C Buffer memory Module start l0 Hex a DEC 116 bit integer Set Dl Setting value Program Label reference program Execution history 282 YA Force OFF Force ON Force OFF Force ON Module start 0 Ad
148. ccurred Check Warning output flag UniG 115 11 2 7 When Input signal error detection signal XC turns on Check item Corrective action Is the load cell connected correctly Connect the load cell correctly Are the resistance values between IN and IN and between Remove the load cell from the connection terminal and measure the OUT and OUT of the load cell correct resistance of the load cell itself Perform a visual check and continuity check over the connection cable between EXC and EXC and between S and S terminals to check for faulty locations Is the 5VDC 15 voltage supplied between IN and IN of the load cell Measure the voltage between the load cell signal terminals SIG and SIG The voltage is calculated with the following formula Is the voltage between the load cell signal terminals SIG Load cell output _ Load cell actual load kg x Load cell rated output mV V x 5 V voltage mV and SIG correct ge mV Load cell rated capacity kg Number of load cells in connection Check whether the polarity on the connection is correct The polarity of load cell is different between the compressive load and tensile load Check Input signal error detection flag Un G114 to see whether such voltage is input Is a voltage resulting in an input signal error input i 3 j Check whether the relevant parameter value is set and enabled as expected 11 2 8 When a measured weight value cannot be read Che
149. cesses be sure to check the Current Setting Value of G61LD 2 Execute two point zero calibration Current Two Point Calibration Value Item Setting Yalue Instrumentation Amplifier Gain Setting ral an rated A D Converter Gain Setting xi Zero Offset Output Value 1646 Two Point Zero Calibration Value 65536 4 Click the MELSOFT Series GX Works AY Two point zero calibration will be executed Please make sure that there is nothing on the weighing machine and press Yes 5 The two point zero calibration will be completed MELSOFT Series GX Works 6 Once the two point zero calibration has been J aea eee eee e completed the zero point adjustment and zero tracking correction values are cleared to 0 and the following values are automatically set e Instrumentation Amplifier Gain Setting e A D Converter Gain Setting e Zero Offset Output Value e Two Point Zero Calibration Value poyjau Bulnes z 8 p uonouny uoneqijen JUIOd OM gp Point With nothing placed on the weighing machine with the fixed tare keep the Okg state until the two point zero calibration is completed a When setting Zero Offset to Used and performing the two point zero calibration Set the Count average setting and Moving average setting fields within the range of values specified below e When Averaging processing method setting is set to 0 Sampling Processing There is no limit e When Av
150. ck item Corrective action Is Conversion enable disable setting Un GO set to Conversion disable 1 Is the CPU module set to STOP Set the CPU module to RUN Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Conversion enable 0 236 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 9 When a measured weight value is abnormal Check item Is the cable connected to the load cell disconnected or removed Has Operating condition setting request Y9 been executed Are the values set in the following correct e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 e Load cell rated output Un G52 e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 e Tare zero offset Un G54 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 e Decimal point position Un G59 e Unit Un G60 e Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 e Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 e Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 e Digital output Zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 e Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 Are the values set in the following correct e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 Point Corrective action Perform a visual check and continuity check over the connection
151. code Un G190 e If multiple errors unrelated to the channel occur the error code of the error that occurred last is stored in Latest error code Un G1790 e All errors that have occurred whether related or unrelated to the channel are stored in chronological order in Error history Un G1800 to Un 1999 When one mode switches to another errors are cleared CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Corrective action Reset the values of Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit value setting H Un G31 within the range of 99999 to 99999 Reset the values of Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit value setting H Un G31 After performing two point zero calibration perform two point span calibration Two point zero calibration and two point span calibration cannot be requested simultaneously Perform two point span calibration after Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 bO is set to Two point zero calibration completion 1 Proceed to two point setting after two point calibration is completed Proceed to default setting registration after two point calibration is completed Proceed to two point calibration after default setting registration is completed ISI OPO JOU LL 231 232 range The table below lists the conditions and setting data where no error occurs even if the set da
152. cted and click the Correct the two point calibration value of scale manually Item Setting value A D Converter Gain Setting Zero Offset Output Yalue Two Point Zero Calibration Value Two Point Span Calibration Yalue 175329 Explanation Set offset output value to clear tear weight Valid during operation with the zero offset set Used 0 to 65535 y Continued to the next page 11 Continued y 4 The scale correction setting will be completed MELSOFT Series GX Works 2 Eg 1 Scale correction setting completed Item Instrumentation Amplifier Gain Setting A D Converter Gain Setting Zero Offset Output Value Two Point Zero Calibration Value Two Point Span Calibration Value 12 e 0 3mV Y lt Load cell rated output lt 1 0mV V Set the gain optimum to the rated output setting of e 1 0mV Y lt Load cell rated output lt 2 0mV V MIRA Roe e 2 0mV V lt Load cell rated output lt 3 0mV V ex1 x2 Set the A D converter gain ed This value is valid during operation if the tare zero sE offset function is set to Used ex 16 e x 32 Set the offset output value to cancel the fixed tare hl 0 to 65535 This value is valid during operation if the tare zero offset function is set to Used Set the two point zero calibration value 8388608 to 8388607 Set the two point span calibration value 1 to 8388607 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 8 3 Calculation of gross weight ou
153. ction Channel List Ll No Specification Other Station Other Station E 7 Single Network Co existence Network PLC Direct Coupled Setting Connection Test Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 Coment PLC Type Remotejo EEEE E o ation toute CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H System Image _ 4 41 gt Phone Line Connection C24 CCIECont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Multiple CPU Setting T Continued to the next page 204 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Continued Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor EP Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device wi n d OW C Device Name Buffer Memory Module Start 0000 v HEX Address 0 DEC KO Online o gt Monitor o gt Device Buffer Memory Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format B at ch a oJolo00000 000000 olo Ja 6 See 6 o Enter the buffer memory address of Conversion 2 0 0000000000 089 0 8i 0 10 enable disable setting Un GO to display it 7 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Modify alus Conversion disable 1 DevicejLabel Buffer Memory 8 Device Label ra 9 Check Conversion completion flag Un G113 to Bit y confirm that the conversion is stopped and turn off Turn on Operating condition setting request Y9 Data Type on GRE Operating condition setting reques
154. ction is completed 5 1 Completion status P System 0 Normal completion Except 0 Abnormal completion 2 System area _ 3 S 4 Load cell rated capacity L S 5 Load cell rated capacity H S 6 Load cell rated output S 7 Number of load cells in connection S 8 Tare zero offset function S 9 System area S 10 Maximum weighing capacity setting L S 11 Maximum weighing capacity setting H S 12 Minimum division S 13 Decimal point position S 14 Unit S 15 System area S 16 Standard weight setting L S 17 Standard weight setting H S 18 Installation site gravitational acceleration L Gri Installation site gravitational acceleration System H S 20 Calibration site gravitational acceleration L Oii Calibration site gravitational acceleration H S 22 Digital output zero correction value L S 23 Digital output Zero correction value H S 24 Digital output span correction value L S 25 Digital output span correction value H S 26 System area S 33 S 34 Instrumentation amplifier gain setting S 35 A D converter gain setting S 36 Tare zero offset output value L S 37 Tare zero offset output value H S 38 Two point zero calibration value L 243 avol190 d 9 11 xipueddy suonon1 su pajesipag xipuaddy Device Pp tem Setting data Setting range Set by 8 39 Two point zero calibration value H S 40 Two point span calibration
155. cts weight errors caused by a difference in gravitational acceleration when the calibration site differs from the installation site This setting is not required when the calibration site and installation site are the same The setting range is 97000 to 99999 9 7000 to 9 9999G 32 bit signed binary a Default The default value is 98067 9 8067G Point If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions and the information on errors that occur refer to the following e Minimum division Un G58 2 Page 138 Section 6 2 23 140 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 28 Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 This setting is used to set the gravitational acceleration at the calibration site The setting corrects weight errors caused by a difference in gravitational acceleration when the calibration site differs from the installation site This setting is not required when the calibration site and installation site are the same The setting range is 97000 to 99999 9 7000 to 9 9999G 32 bit signed binary a Default The default value is 98067 9 8067G Point If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions and the information on errors that occur refer to the following e Minimum division Un G58 __ Page 138 Section 6 2 23 141 sjiejoq ejeg Bumes 79 142 29 Digital output zero correct
156. d cells in connection Un G53 e Tare zero offset Un G54 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 e Decimal point position Un G59 e Unit Un G60 G P OGLOAD e Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 e Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 e Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 e Digital output zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 e Digital output span correction value Un G70 UniG71 e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 Writes the following data from the CPU module to the Q61LD e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 e Load cell rated output Un G52 e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 e Tare zero offset Un G54 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 e Decimal point position Un G59 e Unit Un G60 G P OGSTOR e Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 e Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 e Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 e Digital output Zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 e Digital output span correction value Un G70 UniG71 e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero of
157. d in Latest error code Un G1790 e When an input signal error weighing capacity over outside the zero point range or conversion over is detected Input signal error detection signal XC turns on b Clearing of Input signal error detection flag Un G114 e When an input signal error or outside the zero point range occurs set Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 back into the setting range and turn on and off Error clear request YF e When conversion over occurs in two point calibration mode set analog input back into the conversion range and turned on and off Error clear request YF When weighing capacity over occurs during setting Auto restoration 1 in Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 in normal mode Input signal error detection flag is cleared if Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is set back into the setting range When conversion over occurs during setting Auto restoration 1 in Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 in normal mode Input signal error detection flag is cleared if an analog input is set back into the setting range When weighing capacity over occurs during setting Auto stop 0 in Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 in normal mode set Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 back into the setting range and turn on and off Error clear request YF CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 41 Warning output flag Un G115 Whether a warning outp
158. default setting registration perform two point calibration If a record of previous calibration values is available the data can be written to the system from GX Works2 O While the default setting is being registered do not perform the following operation e Turning on and off Two point setting request Y7 e Turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 e Setting Two point calibration request Un G43 O If the default setting registration fails Default value writing completion flag Un G149 b8 will be set to Default value writing failed 1 In such a case remove the error cause and try the default setting registration again For details on the error causes refer to the following e TROUBLESHOOTING 2_ gt 7 Page 225 CHAPTER 11 108 CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS SENT TO FROM CPU MODULE CHAPTER 5 1 0 SIGNALS SENT TO FROM CPU MODULE This chapter describes the Q61LD I O signals 5 1 I O Signals List This section lists the I O signals sent to from the Q61LD Input signal signal direction CPU module Q61LD Output signal signal direction CPU module gt Q61LD x Use prohibited Output value hold request X4 Y4 X5 Use prohibited YS Use prohibited X6 Y6 X7 Two point setting completion flag Y i 7 X8 Warning output signal Y8 X9 Operating condition setting completion flag Y9 XA Two point calibration mode status flag YA Two point calibration mode switch request XB Use prohibited 1 Us
159. detection Measurement process start flag Output of large quantity supply Output of small quantity supply Measurement completion Measurement normal completion Overweight measurement error Underweight measurement error Measurement error Measurement process completion Discharge process start flag Measurement completion stabilization timer Discharge completion stabilization timer 189 O1JUOD JUNOWY JUB SUO JO ajdwex3 welbolg y 6 190 4 Program example X10 M2 M3 M4 M5 M1 M25 AH HH M1 0 M10 M10 i DMOV D4 DO DMOV K100 D10 DMOV K20 D12 DMOV K20 D16 DMOV K20 D18 M10 f DMOV K1000 D20 D D20 D12 D24 D D24 D10 D26 D D20 D16 D28 D D20 D18 D30 D4 DO D2 Tr M5 K50 M16 M17 TO DMOVP D2 D32 gt M20 gt gt M21 A M2 Measurement process start flag Measurement start weight value Setting before quantity determination Head correction setting Overweight setting Underweight setting Measurement setting Supply completion Small quantity supply Overweight judgment Underweight judgment Net weight value Output of large quantity supply Output of small quantity supply Measurement completion Wait for stability of measurement value Overweight underweight judgment value Measurement normal completion Overweight measurement error Underweight measurement error M4 M10 M24 M5 TO DMOV D2 D22 M21 M22 M24 M20 M10 M25 M24 X12 DMOV D2 D22 M30 M30 M2 K50 Hi s 11 END
160. dress 0 H j y Continued to the next page Cloze Hide history fi Clear Open the Device test window online gt Debug gt Device test Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Conversion enable 0 Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 Turn Two point calibration mode switch request YA from off to on so that the module switches to the two point calibration mode Monitor Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 to check if the value has been correctly converted Set the buffer memory data with the settings that have been recorded beforehand 10 Multiply Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 and Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 by the correction factor 11 Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to User setting 1 and Two point setting Un G40 to Write 1 12 Turn Two point setting request Y7 off and on 13 Check that Two point setting completion flag X7 is off and turn off Two point setting request Y7 14 Monitor Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 to check if the value has been correctly converted If the zero point is displaced adjust the zero point with Zero point adjustment request Un G45 If the zero point is significantly displaced perform a two point zero calibration 15 Turn Two point calibration mode switch request YA from on to off so that the module switches to
161. duct shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irr
162. e Data structure is the same as History 1 History 23 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 24 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 25 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 26 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 27 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 28 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 29 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 30 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 31 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 32 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 Read Write 2 Default setting registration command CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY Address Default Data o F setting s Description Read Write l Hex H type registration command ae 1960 History 33 Error code Error occurrence 7ACy 1964 Data structure is the same as History 1 as 1909 History 34 Error code Error occurrence 7B1y 1969 Data structure is the same as History 1 BAN 1970 History 35 Error code Error occurrence 7B6y 1974 Data structure is the same as History 1 ae 1975 History 36 Error code Error occ
163. e a gross weight output value refer to the following e Calculation of gross weight output value gt Page 73 Section 4 8 3 172 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 9 3 Programming for Remote I O Network This section describes a system configuration using the Q61LD in the remote I O network and some program examples Point O For details on MELSECNET H remote I O network refer to the following Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network O Fora program example for constant amount control refer to the following Program Example for Constant Amount Control lt gt Page 187 Section 9 4 1 System configuration Remote master station Remote I O station Station No 0 Station No 1 QJ71LP21 25 XY0 to XY1F QX10 X20 to X2F QY10 Y30 to Y3F ATT Q61LD X Y1000 to X Y100F QJ72LP25 25 Network No 1 2 Programming conditions The programming conditions are the same as those for use in the normal system configuration e Programming conditions gt Page 166 Section 9 2 2 YIOMION O I 3J0UW3Y JO HuluswesBOld 6 173 3 Device list Device Function QX10 X20 to X2F X2C Initial setting request signal Y30 to Y3F Error code display 4 digits in BCD QY10 Y30 to Y3F X1000 Module ready X1001 Stable status X1002 Center point status X1003 Output value hold status flag X1008 Warning output signal X1009 Operating conditi
164. e in the following status Two point calibration mode status flag XA ON Module ready X0 OFF RUN LED Flashing Two point zero calibration request 1 When something is placed on the weigh scale remove it Check that the scale indicates Okg Set Two point zero calibration enable 1 to Set Conversion enable 0 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO and turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 Set Load cell rated output Un G52 Set Not used 1 to Tare zero offset Un G54 Two point calibration setting Un G42 0 Set Two point zero calibration requested 1 to Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 Check that Two point zero calibration completion 1 is stored to Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 b0 Set Two point calibration not requested 0 to Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 Check that Two point calibration not Other settings are not required requested 0 is stored to Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 b0 Turn off Two point calibration mode switch request YA Check that the signals and LED are in the Set Write 1 to Two point setting Un G40 Turn on and then off Two point setting request Y7 following status Two point calibration mode status flag XA OFF Module ready X0 ON RUN LED ON 4 Set the specifications of the load cell rated output of the actually connec
165. e not updated but is held even when the analog input load cell output changes e Use Output value hold status flag X3 as an interlock to turn on and off Output value hold request Y3 Output value HOLD request Y3 i Output value Hold staus LX Output value HOLD flag X3 Executed by the Q61LD Point When the CPU module key switch is moved to STOP position or an error occurs while Output value hold request Y3 is on the following status occurs e Output value hold request Y3 turns off e The output value is no longer held s 1e 9g euBbis O I Z S 111 112 5 Two point setting completion flag X7 Two point setting request Y7 e When Two point setting request Y7 is turned on Two point setting completion flag X7 will turn off Turn on and off Two point setting request Y7 to read or write the following setting data Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 Load cell rated output Un G52 Number of load cells in connection Un G53 Tare zero offset Un G54 Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 Decimal point position Un G59 Unit Un G60 Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 Digital output zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 Instrumentation ampli
166. e prohibited XC Input signal error detection signal Maximum and minimum values reset o XD YD Maximum and minimum values reset request completion flag XE Conversion completion signal Use prohibited XF Error flag Error clear request Point Use prohibited signals indicated with 1 are only for system use If any of them is turned on and off in a sequence program the performance of the Q61LD is not guaranteed Two point setting request Use prohibited Operating condition setting request sI7 sjeuBis O I 1 S 109 5 2 1 0 Signal Details This section describes the l O signals of the Q61LD in detail For details on the functions that use these signals refer to the following e FUNCTION 237 Page 34 CHAPTER 4 1 Module ready X0 a In the normal mode e This signal turns on when a CPU module is powered on or reset as soon as the module is ready for conversion then the Q61LD performs conversion e While this signal is off the Q61LD does not perform any conversion b In the two point calibration mode e The Q61LD performs conversion even when Module ready X0 is off c Off condition This signal turns off when the Q61LD is in the following status e In two point calibration mode e When a watchdog timer error has occurred conversion is not performed 4 This error occurs when sequence program operation is not completed within the set time due to such as a hardware error The RUN LED tur
167. e setting Zero tracking time setting Stop conversion over automatic restoration setting Usable later than product information 120110000000000 C Warning output function Warning output setting warning output Warning output setting imput signal error detection Input signal error detection setting Zero point range setting Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Gross weight lower upper limit value setting Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Gross weight upper upper limit value setting This area is used to set whether the warning upper lower limit alarm will be output or stopped on a channel basis 5 Set the conversion system O Enable 5 Combination Use of Count Average and Moving Average 10 Times 16 Times 2 10 x100ms 2 100 x100ms 0 Auto Stop Set about the warning of conversion 0 Warning Output Enabled 0 Input signal error detection enable 5 0 o 10 0 100 50 179 YIOMION O I 3J0UW3Y JO HuluswesBOld 6 4 Open the Q61LD auto refresh setting window and set the following When creating a program without using intelligent function module parameters skip this step DO Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module Name gt Auto Refresh 0000 Q61LD Auto_Refresh Display All 5 Write the set parameters to the remote I O module and reset the remote I O module W Online gt Writ
168. e to PLC Press the switch a gt for a while 180 7 Program example X100F HL Z REMF T K1 K1 HO K1800 D1190 K1 M300 M300 M301 SET M302 M301 H N RST M302 X100F M302 HS HA BCD D1190 K4 30 X100F BCD KO K4Y30 X100F X29 Y100F X100C X1000 X1009 Y1009 X1003 X100E A A A A A A A M0 X100C W34 0 bh UY W34 1 HA A M3 W34 2 ec sig W34 3 _ oo X1008 W35 0 RS M5 W35 1 M6 MO X1001 4 M8 X1002 D KO w4 HMO MO SET D1045 0 ZP REMTO jgn K3 K1 HO K45 D1045 K1 M260 M260 M261 SET M262 D1045 0 W36 0 RST D1045 0 X100C ZP REMTO J1 K3 K45 D1045 K1 M270 X100A M270 M271 3 _ a _ ______ SET M272 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING Reading of error code Output an error code in BCD Error code output OFF Error clear request ON Gross weight output conversion in processing Outside the zero point range An alarm is output even when Warning output setting is configured to be disabled Weighing capacity over An alarm is output even when Warning output setting is configured to be disabled Input signal error detection Conversion over Gross weight upper limit Gross weight lower limit Safety status output Center zero point detection Zero set request ON Zero set completion Zero set request OFF 181 YIOMION O I 3J0UW3Y JO HuluswesBOld 6 182 M272 W36 0 RST M260 M261 RST M270 M271 MO X2B SET ZP REMTO
169. easurement process end Discharge process start Discharge process end Description Checks that the weight output value is equal to or smaller than the near zero setting the weighing hopper is empty Even when the weighing hopper is empty the value is often not Okg due to material adherence or across the ages Therefore when the value is below an allowable range near zero point setting the system starts measurement assuming that the weighing hopper is empty Stores the gross weight output value immediately before start of measurement Supplies materials at high speed until the net weight value gross weight output value gross weight value stored immediately before start of measurement exceeds the setting before quantity determination Supplies materials at low speed after the net weight value exceeds the setting before quantity determination Closes the supply valve when the net weight value exceeds measurement completion measurement setting value head correction setting While the supply valve is closed the materials floating in the air cannot be detected For this reason the discharge valve is closed before head correction setting so that the measurement value matches the setting value when the material floating in the air lands Waits until the gross weight output value is stable and checks for overweight underweight measurement errors Proceeds to the next process upon completion of measurement without problem
170. em configuration O O U Cc N A number of connecting load cells Three load cells Load cell rated output 2 0mV V Load cell rated capacities 300 0kg Load cell N Load cell que QY10 Y20 to Y2F Load cell 1 __ QX10 X10 to X1F Q61LD X YO to X YF ON NU ij ease T EN UuoIeINBYUOD wa s s JEWION ul BuluuwesbOld Z 6 165 166 2 Programming conditions a Scale Initial Setting Make the following settings in the Scale Initial Setting window and perform two point calibration Current Setting Value of Q61LD Load cell Item Rated Capacity Rated Output Mumber of load cells in connection Scale Setting Item Zero Offset Maximum Weighing Capacity Minimum Division Decimal Point Position Unit Standard Weight Setting Installation Site Item Explanation span calibration 1 to 99999 Item Rated Capacity Rated Output Number of load cells in connection Zero Offset Maximum Weighing Capacity Minimum Division Decimal Point Position Unit Standard Weight Setting Installation Site Gravitational Acceleration Scale Initial Setting 0000 061LD 1 Seta condition to execute bmo polnt zero span calibration Setting Value 3000 2 Orn 3 Setting Value Used 3000 1 0 1 kg a 3000 Setting Value Installation Site Gravitational Acceleration 9 80676 Set amount of weight to place on load cell at time o
171. en GX Developer is used Warning output function a oa aaaea aa 100 Ae Gece ids tara atta deta a T E 268 Warning output setting Un G20 130 Operating condition setting completion flag X9 114 Warning output signal X8 113 Operating condition setting request Y9 114 Weighing Capacity OVET o o oooooooooo o 91 Output value hold function 106 Weight conversion method 82 Output value hold request Y3 111 When GX Developer is Used 251 Output value hold status flag X3 111 Outside the zero point range 92 Z P Zero point adjustment completion flag Un G145 ee ff Ne ba oe beer ee ee eee 150 Parameter setting o oo o 160 Zero point adjustment request Un G45 134 Program Example for Constant Amount Control 187 Zero point range setting Un G22 131 Zero set reset function o ooooooo 89 R Zero tracking function o o o o ooo oo 86 Zero tracking range setting Un G6 129 Response time 26 Zero tracking time setting Un G7 129 RUN CEDI rakaa ecards 155 S Sampling processing o o oooo ooo 82 Save restoration setting list 222 Serial number display 155 Stable Slats acera es 105 Stable status X1 o oo ooooooomoooo 110 Stable status range setting Un G
172. en there is no load on the load cell CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 3 Outline of Processing Ex This section describes the outline of the setting and processing when the weight of 300kg is measured using four load cells under the following conditions The fixed tare weight is assumed to be 600kg e Rated capacity 300kg e Rated output 1 2mV V Description Setting value Load cell rated capacity 3000 300 0kg Load cell rated output 12 1 2mV Number of load cells in connection 4 Maximum weighing capacity setting 3000 300 0kg Decimal point position 14 x 10 Fixed tare weight EN 600 0kg e Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 For the load cell load of 600 0kg to 900 0kg the output value of O to 3000 maximum weighing capacity will be produced e Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 The level from the unloaded load cell output of OmV V up to Load cell rated capacity Un G52 is converted to the output value of 0 to 10000 The accuracy is 0 01 for 2 0mV V Load cell rated capacity 300kg x 4 7FFFFFH in a ca ee o Span Fixed tare weighing capacity pom 900 0 7777777777777777 l Zero Fixed tare point 7 OO ME se y Conversion range upper limit 2 309mV V 300 0 0 Load cell rated output 0 0 _ 4 paa Load cell output mV V 0 0 0 4 0 8 16 20 2 309 A D conversion value 000000H Digital output value Accuracy 0 01 towards 0 0 to 2 0 mV V 5000 7500 SS 1
173. ence Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 lt Load cell rated capacity s Un G50 Un G51 Number of load cells in connection Refer to Setting Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 lt Page 267 Appendix 4 3 2 a Un G53 APPENDICES a Setting Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 Enter the calculated value to Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 The formula is as follows Maximum weighing Load cell Capacity setting x rated output x Un G56 Un G57 mVA Un G52 Factory default span calibration value Two point span calibration value Load cell Number of load Instrumentation rated capacity x cells in connection x amplifier gain Un G50 Un G51 Un G53 setting mV V 4 For Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 assign the value of Op 1 0mV YV 14 2 0mV V or 2y 3 0mV V For the factory default span calibration value the buffer memory address to be referenced depends on the setting value of Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 Apply values to the formula referring to the following buffer memory areas Setting value of Instrumentation amplifier gain Buffer memory address to be referenced setting Un G80 0 3mV V lt Load cell rated output lt 1 0mV V 0p 1 0mV V span calibration value Un G1616 Un G1617 1 0mV V lt Load cell rated output lt 2 0mV V
174. er bit of the Input signal error detection flag will be set to ON 1 e Outside the zero point range When zero set is made exceeding the range of zero point adjustment the Outside the zero Input signal error point range bit will be set to ON 1 Page 91 detection function e Input signal error Section 4 12 When the weight exceeds the upper limit of the gross weight arbitrarily set the Input signal error bit will be set to ON 1 e Conversion over When the analog input load cell output exceeds the conversion range the Conversion over bit will be set to ON 1 Page 100 Warning output function When the gross weight output value falls within a predefined range a warning will be produced aie Aaa This function detects the center point of the scale for the gross weight output value Center point 1 4 scale Page 102 l The minimum division is further divided by four if the measurement is found to be at the center detection function aa ie Section 4 14 point of the minimum division Center point status X2 will be set to ON When the following condition is satisfied Stable status X1 will be set to ON to show the stable rare eee rere status of Gross weight output value Un G100 UniG101 Page 105 e The variation of the gross weight output value is contained within a predefined width of Section 4 15 variation and the status is maintained for a specified period of time Maximum and minimum i ha Page 106 Wr
175. er changing the site the value set in Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 is automatically stored in Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 2 Correction equation The correction equation is as follows Gross weight output value _ Gross weight Calibration site gravitational acceleration Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G100 Un G101 before correction Un G66 Un G67 Un G64 Un G65 06 Ex When two point calibration is performed at Location A 9 789m s and the scale is to be used at Location B 9 805m s If the object weighs 1000 0kg at Location A and weighed again at Location B the gross weight output value will change as follows because the gravitational acceleration is higher at Location B Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 1000 0 kg x 9 805 m s x 9 798 m s 1000 7 kg If Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 is set to 97980 and Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 is set to 98050 the correction will be made as follows Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 1000 7 kg x 97980 Location A 98050 Location B 1000 0 kg CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 3 Setting method Use the Scale Initial Setting window for the setting 1 Select the module to use the gravitational Module Selection ooga M61LD Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Analog Module
176. eraging processing method setting is set to 2 Count Average 1000ms Count average setting x 10ms e When Averaging processing method setting is set to 3 Moving Average 1000ms Moving average setting x 10ms e When Averaging processing method setting is set to 5 Combination Use of Count Average and Moving Average 1000ms Count average setting x Moving average setting x 10ms 6 68 b If the fixed tare weight has been changed Only two point zero calibration must be performed before using the machine again However if the amount of fixed tare weight difference exceeds 111 of Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b3 may be set to Conversion over 1 If two point zero calibration is performed while the Conversion over 1 error is present there may be a case that two or more two point zero calibration operations are required for completing it normally After completing the two point zero calibration operation turn on and off Error clear request YF If Conversion over 1 error persists perform the two point zero calibration again 5 Two point span calibration Use the Scale Initial Setting window for the setting 1 Select the module to be used and click the Module Selection Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting Module Selection Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt 0000 Q61LD Analog Module gt Q61LD Two P
177. esistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start
178. etion on the scale after the previous two point calibration If the zero tracking time has passed while Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is kept within the zero tracking range zero point adjustment will be performed automatically and Gross weight output value Un G100 UniG101 will be set to 0 This zero point adjustment will not affect the variation range of the output value The range within which the correction can be made is determined by Zero point range setting Un G22 Exceeded the zero point range Zero point range setting Un G22 ZERO point after zero tracking Original gross weight output value ossaa a A ce a P Weight A I I 1 AY Y Tracking range Tracking time 4 Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 when Zero tracking is not performed When Zero set is performed this value becomes Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 2 After correction Gross weight output value will be O at this weight value D If the zero point after zero tracking exceeds the zero point range set zero tracking will not be performed Description As Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is within the range of 0 Zero tracking range setting Un G6 for the duration of Zero tracking time setting Un G7 set the zero point is corrected and Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is set to O As Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 exceeds the range of Ze
179. etting Un G41 to Automatic setting 0 perform Two point zero calibration requested 1 of Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 An optimal value is set automatically e When using this setting with Two point calibration method setting Un G41 set to User setting 1 refer to Tare Zero Offset Function 2 gt Page 51 Section 4 6 e The setting range is 0 to 65535 0 to 110 32 bit signed binary Point O If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions and the information on errors that occur refer to the following e Minimum division Un G58 Page 138 Section 6 2 23 Because Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 increases in the negative direction the setting range is 0 to 110 33 Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 This setting is used to set the two point zero calibration value The setting range is 8388608 to 8388607 32 bit signed binary Point O If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions and the information on errors that occur refer to the following e Minimum division Un G58 lt _ gt Page 138 Section 6 2 23 O l Two point calibration method setting Un G41 is set to Automatic setting 0 when the sequence program is used the setting of Two point zero calibration value is ignored sjiejoq ejeq Bumes 79 Usually perform operation wit
180. f the instruction in the ladder mode Setting side User Device value is set by the user System Device value is set by the CPU module of the instruction Conditions for the error and error codes For the errors not described in this manual refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Simple program example s 4 and descriptions of the devices used 12 zi his instruction closes a connection specified in Disconnection of a connection The result of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction can be checked with the completion device 0 and 1 Completion device 0 Turns on in the END processing of a scan after completion of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction and tums off in the next END processing Completion device 1 Turns on or off according to the result of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction Tums on in the END processing of a scan after completion of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction and turns off in the next END processing A de of an operation error tums on the Error flag SMO and a corresponding error code is stored in SDO when The connection number specified for amp is other than 1 to 16 Error code 4101 The device numbers specified for 2 and exceed the device point range Error code 4101 An invalid device is specified Error code 4004 6 Program example D When M2000 is tumed on or r when the connected device disconnects connection No 1 c
181. f two point Description Set 300 0kg Set 2 0mV V Set 3 modules Use the tare zero offset function Set 300 0kg Set 0 1kg Set x 1077 first decimal place Set kg Set 300 0kg Set 9 8067G CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING b Initial setting value Item Description Conversion enable disable setting Enable conversion Averaging processing method setting Set combination use of count average and moving average Count average setting Set 10 times Moving average setting Set 16 times Stable status range setting Set 0 2kg Stable status time setting Set 1 0 second Zero tracking range setting Set 0 05kg 1 2 scale Zero tracking time setting Set 10 0 second Conversion over automatic restoration setting Set Auto Stop Warning output setting warning output Set Warning output enable Warning output setting input signal error detection Set Input signal error detection setting to enable Input signal error detection setting Set 5 0 15 0kg Zero point range setting Set 10 0 30 0kg Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Set 10 0kg Gross weight lower upper limit value setting Set 5 0kg Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Set 245 0kg Gross weight upper upper limit value setting Set 250 0kg c Zero point adjustment request Un G45 Set Zero point adjustment request Un G45 to correct the zero point 3 Device list K Device Function 3 x z XA Tue point caibraton mode status ag o x Y E ve Y20
182. fier gain setting O Otherwise the following status will result e An error will be registered in Latest error code UniG 190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence 4 Set A D converter gain setting Un G81 to 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 times 2 Set Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 to 1 0mV V 2 0mV V or 3 0mV V 19 3 Setting details The following table shows the setting details for two point calibration Load cell Scale Setting 80 4 Rated Capacity Set the load cell rated capacity 1 to 999999 Rated Output Set the load cell rated output in 0 1mV V increments 0 3 to 3 0 Number of load cells Set the number of load cells connected in parallel 1 to 4 in connection Zero Offset Set the tare zero offset function to Not Used Not Used Maximum Weighing ee Set the rated capacity as a weighing machine 1 to 99999 Capacity Setting e 1 2 Set the minimum division of Gross weight output value 5 Un G100 Un G101 e 10 e 20 e 50 0 ex 0 1 e x 0 01 e x 0 001 e x 0 0001 Minimum Division Decimal Point Set the decimal point position of Gross weight output value Position Un G100 Un G101 g Set the unit of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 kg et Set the weight value mass of the standard Standard Weight Set the weight value mass of the standard weight to be placed 4 ee os weight to be p
183. fier Gain Setting output lt 3 0mi A D Converter Gain Setting x1 Zero Offset Output Value 1646 Two Point Zero Calibration Value 65536 6 Click the i button MELSOFT Series GX Works T Two point zero calibration will be executed Please make sure that there is nothing on the weighing machine and press Yes 7 The two point zero calibration will be completed MELSOFT Series GX Works Db Two paoint zero calibration completed Point O With nothing placed on the weighing machine with the fixed tare keep the Okg state until the two point zero calibration is completed O Set the specified load cell rated output of the load cell to be actually connected Multiple load cells connected in parallel can be regarded as a single load cell of which rated capacity is n times the capacity of each cell where n is the number of identical load cells connected in parallel 76 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 2 Setting to use Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 Use the Scale Initial Setting window for the setting 1 Select the module to be used and click the Module Selection Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting X Module Selection DO Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt ooga Q61LD Analog Module gt Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting Cancel 2 Click the button Two Point Calibration Setting 0000 Q61LD Set two point calibration setting When you u
184. fier gain setting Un G80 A D converter gain setting Un G81 Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 When Two point setting request Y7 is turned off Two point setting completion flag X7 will turn on Use Two point setting completion flag X7 as an interlock to turn on and off Two point setting request Y7 Two point calibration mode status flag XA Two point setting completion flag X7 Two point setting Un G Two point setting request Y7 Executed in a sequence program nie Executed by the Q61LD CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS SENT TO FROM CPU MODULE 6 Warning output signal X8 This signal can be used only in the normal mode a On condition This signal turns on in the following status e A value stored in Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is larger than or equal to the value stored in Gross weight upper upper limit value setting Un G30 Un G31 or smaller or equal to the value stored in Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Un G24 Un G25 b Off condition This signal turns off in the following status e Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 returns to within the setting range which is smaller than Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Un G28 Un G29 or is larger than Gross weight lower upper limit value setting Un G26 UniG27 Un G115 X 1
185. flag XA will turn on and the Q61LD will operate in the two point calibration mode When the Q61LD operates in the two point calibration mode Module ready X0 will turn off al e Use Two point calibration mode status flag XA as an interlock to turn on and off Two point calibration mode E switch request YA a E D gt D Module ready X0 7 F O Two points calibration mode J de D switch request YA EA En il Two points calibration E mode status flag XA sia Executed by the Q61LD Point When the CPU module key switch is moved to STOP position or an error occurs while Two point calibration mode switch request YA is on the following status occurs e Two point calibration mode switch request YA turns off and therefore the Q61LD operates in the normal mode 115 116 9 Input signal error detection signal XC a On condition This signal turns on in the following status e Input signal error detection flag Un G114 detects any of the following Weighing capacity over 1 Outside the zero point range 1 Input signal error 1 and Conversion over 1 e The condition under which Input signal error detection signal XC turns on and the status in which Input signal error detection signal XC has turned on depend on Weighing capacity over 1 Outside the zero point range 1 Input signal error 1 and Conversion over 1 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 0 Input signal error A 0 Input
186. formed without an actual load When two point calibration does not require accuracy calibration can be performed without using an actual load This type of calibration is useful for the level meter of the storage silo torque meter pressure gage and others This section describes how to perform such type of calibration When calibration with an actual load is not performed configure the following settings e Set Tare zero offset Un G54 to Not used 1 e Perform two point zero calibration The two point span calibration is not performed For the setting by using a sequence program refer to the following e When calibration is performed without an actual load 2 gt Page 263 Appendix 4 3 1 When using Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 A value of 0 to 10000 which is converted from the signal of 0 mV V to Load cell rated output Un G52 is stored as Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 When Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 is used set Tare zero offset Un G54 to Not used 1 and set Load cell rated output Un G52 to an adequate value for the load cell to be used Point O Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 cannot be used for some functions The following functions cannot be used e Stable status e Center point 1 4 scale detection function e Warning output function e Zero set reset function e Input signal error detection function 4 Although Input signal error detection signal XC as well as In
187. fset output value Un G82 Un G83 Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 Point When the Q61LD is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station the dedicated instructions cannot be used 240 APPENDICES 2 Available devices The following table lists devices available for the dedicated instructions Internal device E File register Constant 1 By using these devices as bit data a word device can be specified by bit Specify a word device by bit in the format of word device bit No A bit number is specified in hexadecimal For example bit 10 of DO is specified by DO A Note that timer T retentive timer ST and counter C cannot be specified by bit 241 suonon41 su pajesipag xipuaddy Appendix 1 1 G P OGLOAD Command G OGLOAD TL _ Command GP OGLOAD 1 Setti Ea device a Constant is UDNGO Others data K H a S 1 Setting data Un Head I O number of module 16 bit binary Within the S Head number of the device storing control data specified device Device name range Device turned on for one scan on completion of the processing of the dedicated Within the D instruction specified device Bit In the event of abnormal completion D 1 also turns on range 242 APPENDICES 2 Control data Device Mem Setting data Setting range Set by o femme Y Y Stores status of when the instru
188. g capacity setting REA 39y eee weighing capacity setting H 10000 3By Decimal Decimal point position position Cy o 2 we HE EE I 119 Default Address Data a A setting Description Read Write 7 Hex H type registration command SEy Standard weight setting 10000 3Fy 6 Standard weight setting H Installation site ab acceleration 404 64 L Installation site gravitational acceleration 41H 6 H 98067 Calibration site gravitational acceleration 424 Prey Rw O Calibration site gravitational acceleration H Digital output zero correction value L 434 O 44y 454 464 474 484 Digital output zero correction value H N O Digital output span correction value L Digital output span correction value H eee MA i N N N 56y 574 584 Two point span calibration value 00 NI eco O AFy 79 50y Instrumentation amplifier gain setting MES 514 8 A D converter gain setting TS Pr RW O 52H 82 Tare zero offset output value L 53H 83 Tare zero offset output value H 54 y 84 Two point zero calibration value L 99H 85 Two point zero calibration value H i no e Two point span calibration value H System area 634 64 Gross Gross weight output value L output value L 65 oe Gross weight output value aaa ae 66 a Digital output value ine 67 Digital output value RE 69 Maximum Maximum gross weight output value H Maximum gros
189. ge setting Count Average Stable status range setting S Moving Average gt ee ae ney cee rea 5 Combination Use of Count 4verage and Moving Average 2 Set corresponding values for Count average setting and Moving average setting see processing method 5 Combination Use of Count Average and Moving Average Count average setting A A Moving average setting Eee Item Setting value Count average setting 4 to 255 Moving average setting 2 to 255 Ex When Count average setting is set to 4 times and Moving average setting is set to 2 times Sampling cycle 10ms 3 e 5 gt A 2 6 9 1 9 38 13 A 16 i 7 o ELO a aa 7 S g de gt o o 4 l mn i ee l e E e 7 i l o 4 E 3 1st storage a 2nd storage b 3rd storage c 0 Time ms ON Conversion completion signal XE or D Conversion completion flag Un G113 Conversion stop 0 x Conversion completion 1 Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 a b c Data transition in buffer memory 1st storage a 2nd storage 3rd storage c E EY 2 E A a 85 4 10 Zero Tracking Function No 1 2 86 This function automatically adjusts the zero point when Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 does not return to O even when no measuring load is on the scale due to temperature change or any accr
190. gt Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting Cancel button Two Point Calibration Setting O000 Q61LD Set two point calibration setting When you uze the scale for the first time or scale installation site has been changed please specify the scale initial setting Without the Scale Initial Setting the following settings cannot work appropriately When cale installation site was changed from the site where the two point calibration was performed gravitational acceleration needs to be corrected Please set the installation site Installation Site Setting When correcting the two paint calbration setting values please set the scale conection setting Scale Correction Setting y Continued to the next page UONOUN UO DEIOD UONEJa a99 Y JBuoneyAelo py of Continued 3 Set the value for Installation Site Gravitational Installation Site Acceleration and click the i Setting Value Item Installation Site Gravitational Acceleration 9 80676 ee The setting range of gravitational acceleration is Set rated capacity of load cell 9 7000 to 9 9999 1 to 999999 4 Click the button MELSOFT Series GX Works Condition change will be written to the module Do vou want to continue 5 The setting is complete MELSOFT Series GX Works2 X LI Condition reflection completed OKC Point When tw
191. h Two point calibration method setting Un G41 set to Automatic setting 0 Calibration with Two point calibration method setting Un G41 set to User setting 1 is performed when calibration value backup data is applied or when fine adjustment is required after calibration is once performed with Two point calibration method setting Un G41 set to Automatic setting 0 145 34 Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 This setting is used to set the two point span calibration value The setting range is 1 to 8388607 32 bit signed binary Point O If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions and the information on errors that occur refer to the following e Minimum division Un G58 7 Page 138 Section 6 2 23 O if Two point calibration method setting Un G41 is set to Automatic setting 0 when the sequence program is used the setting of Two point zero calibration value is ignored Usually perform operation with Two point calibration method setting Un G41 set to Automatic setting 0 Calibration with Two point calibration method setting Un G41 set to User setting 1 is performed when calibration value backup data is applied or when fine adjustment is required after calibration is once performed with Two point calibration method setting Un G41 set to Automatic setting 0 35 Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 e Gross weight output v
192. hange PACKING LIST Quantity Q61LD load cell input module 1 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW CHAPTER 1 overview 1 1 Features 1 Parallel connection of up to four load cells Up to four 350Q load cells can be connected to the Q61LD in parallel Also the 6 wire type remote sensing method and the ratiometric method are used 2 High accuracy to fully exploit the excellent performance of the load cell e Nonlinearity Within 0 01 FS accuracy at ambient temperature 25 C module alone e Zero drift Within 0 25u V C RTI e Gain drift Within 15ppm C 3 Selectable rated output of the load cell The output range of the load cell is selectable from 0 0 to 1 0mV V 0 0 to 2 0mV V and 0 0 to 3 0mV V 4 Maximum weighing capacity The rated values of the weighing machine can be specified within a range up to five digits 1 to 99999 Excluding any decimal point or unit symbol 5 Easy to obtain the actual weight value By setting the rated capacity the maximum weighing capacity of the weighing machine the actual weight value can be obtained by scaling the converted value according to the specified range 1 9 Q a Cc 4 02 6 Various weight conversion methods are available The following methods are available for the conversion process e Sampling processing e Count average processing e Moving average processing e Combination use of count average and moving average 7 Warning output function upper
193. hanged by Two point calibration setting request Y7 e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 a Parameter adjustment in automatic setting The automatic setting will be performed in such a way that the calculation result of the following equation is larger than 0 5 and equal to or less than 1 A D converter Maximum weighing x Rated output mV V x gain setting capacity setting Rated capacities x Connection numbers x Instrumentation amplifier gain setting If operating conditions different from the actual ones are set the A D converter gain setting Un G81 will not automatically be set to a proper value Depending on the conditions set Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b3 will result in Conversion over 1 92 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION b How to calculate the tare zero offset output value When the two point zero calibration is performed Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 will be automatically adjusted and registered in such a way that the analog input mV load cell output corresponding to the fixed tare weight kg is set to O mV Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 for the analog input load cell output mV that corresponds to the A D converter output value of 8388607 can be set in the range of 0 to 65535 Tare zero offset output value 0 corresponds to O mV The fixed tare weight kg
194. he Q61LD are added or changed by the version upgrade The functions available for the Q61LD depend on the first five digits of the serial number Functions added changed Conversion over automatic restoration setting Default setting registration function 250 Ae First 5 digits of Description i Reference product information Using Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 the Page 91 operation in case of a weighing capacity over or conversion over 3 i Section 4 12 can be set to auto stop or auto restoration Restores the setting values in the following buffer memory areas to 12011 or later the default values Page 107 For the buffer memory areas whose data are to be changed back Section 4 18 to the default refer to the following Buffer Memory List L gt Page 118 Section 6 1 APPENDICES Appendix 3 When GX Developer is Used This section describes the operation method using GX Developer 1 I O assignment Perform I O assignment from I O Assignment of PLC Parameter O Parameter gt PLC parameter gt I O assignment Q parameter setting PLC name PLC system PLC file PLORAS 1 PLORAS 2 Device Program Boot file SFC 140 assignment 1 0 Assignment Slt Tpe Modelmame Points Stary a E o oa__ E Switch setting Detailed setting El ETS ey E A ey A o ey pp HA 8 a ey y EH EOR A H MH E Assign
195. he value of Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 within the range of 0 to 2 229 code Description decimal The setting of Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 does not meet that of Load cell rated output Un G52 1151 Minor The value set in A D converter gain setting UniG81 is 1152 Minor outside the range of 0 to 5 The value set in A D converter gain setting Un G81 does not meet the following conditions Capacity setting x Rated output mV V x A D converter gain setting a A A AA Instrumentation amplifier Rated capacities x Connection numbers x gain setting 1153 Minor Set the values corresponding to 1 2 4 8 16 and 32 times for A D converter gain setting Un G81 Set 0y for 1 0mV V 14 for 2 0mV V and 2 for 3 0mV V for Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 The value set in Tare zero offset output value Un G82 1160 Minor Un G83 is outside the range of 0 to 65535 The value set in Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 is outside the range of 8388608 to 8388607 1161 Minor The value set in Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 is outside the range of 1 to 8388607 4200 The value set in Averaging processing method setting Un G1 is other than 0 2 3 and 5 The value set in Count average setting Un G2 is outside the 1201 Minor range of 4 to 255 1162 Minor The value set in Moving average setting Un G3 is outside
196. ide the electrical reading of OmV V fixed tare is removed from the output and an adequate gain is selected 2 After completing the two point zero calibration place a standard weight on the platform to perform the two point span calibration Standard weight Fixed tare Load cell Two point zero calibration Two point span calibration JyBIi8M JON pue YBa SSOID de L pexi4 ZY 37 2 Gross weight and net weight The gross weight GROSS refers to the total weight including the tare measuring container and the subject to be measured The net weight NET refers to the weight excluding the tare measuring container The term tare refers to the measuring container in which the subject to be measured is placed upon measuring the weight Tare container Measured material Fixed tare Load cell Before measurement After measurement The net weight NET can be calculated from Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 by using the following method e Before start measuring the weight of the subject store Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 as the tare If the zero point of the gross weight is shifted due to any deposit the zero set reset function can be used to deal with this gt Page 89 Section 4 11 e Start measuring the weight of the subject to be weighed By subtracting the tare weight from Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 the net weight NET can
197. imit alarm will turn on when Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 has changed from 1000 to 1010 100 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION b Clearing the warning After a warning has been issued the warning will be automatically cleared under the following conditions in increments of the value set in Minimum division Un G58 e When the value becomes smaller than Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Un G28 Un G29 or larger than Gross weight lower upper limit value setting Un G26 Un G27 and thus it returned to within the range of normal operation Once the warning is cleared the status of the Q61LD will be as follows e The bits corresponding to the upper and lower limit values of Warning output flag Un G115 will be set to Normal 0 e Warning output signal X8 turns off e The ALM LED turns off Ex When Minimum division Un G58 is set to 10 and Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Un G28 Un G29 is set to 905 The upper limit alarm will turn off when Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 has changed from 910 to 900 Point When Warning output setting Un G20 is set to Warning output disabled 1 values from Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit value setting H Un G31 are ignored 2 Setting method 1 Setthe Warning output setting warning output to 0 Warning Output Enabled Project window gt Intelligent Function Module
198. ing a Zero tracking range setting Set the reference range of change to perform automatic zero point adjustment when the zero point has changed after two point calibration due to temperature change or any accretion on the scale b Zero tracking time setting Set the reference time to perform automatic zero point adjustment when the zero point has changed after two point calibration due to temperature change or any accretion on the scale 2 Setting method 1 Set values for Zero tracking range setting and Zero tracking time setting DO Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Parameter jo IRE IAS III TIA E ADADA eener Zero tracking range setting 40 Zero tracking time setting 50 x100ms Item Setting value Zero tracking range setting 0 to 100 x 1 4 of Minimum Division Zero tracking time setting 0 to 100 x 100ms 2 4 Set Minimum division Un G58 in the Scale Initial Setting window lt _ Page 64 Section 4 8 2 3 2 Although it is set in 100ms increments the internal processing is performed with the interval of 10ms x Count average setting Un G2 Point When Zero tracking range setting Un G6 and Zero tracking time setting Un G7 are set to 0 zero tracking will not be performed When setting the tracking range to 10 divisions and the tracking time to 5 seconds Set Zero tracking range setting to 40 and Zero tracking time setting to 50 88 CHAPTER 4 F
199. ing input signal error detection to 0 Input signal error detection enable Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Parameter Warning output setting warning output 1 Warning Output Disabled Waning output setting finput _ signal error detection O Input signal error detection enable Input signal error detection setting E signal error detection enable o Zero point range setting 1 Input signal error detection disable 2 Enter a value into Zero point range setting EESTI EEE SEE EC Zero point range setting O A AIN I I 1 I Item Setting value Zero point range setting 0 0 to 10 0 d Conversion over 1 Set Warning output setting input signal error detection to 0 Input signal error detection enable Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Parameter Warning output setting warning output 1 Warning Output Disabled Warning output setting finput _ i signal error detection O Input signal error detection enable Input signal error detection setting AMA as Zero point range setting 1 Input signal error detection disable 2 Set Conversion over automatic restoration setting Usable later than product to 0 Auto Stop or 1 Auto Restoration Stop conversion over automatic 0 Auto Sto restoration setting Usable Ae RUSO ee fater than product Warning output function 0 Auto
200. ing off the programmable controller CPU e Resetting the programmable controller CPU 262 APPENDICES Appendix 4 3 When calibration is performed without an actual load When two point calibration does not require accuracy calibration can be performed without using an actual load This type of calibration is useful for the level meter of the storage silo torque meter pressure gage and others This section describes how to perform such type of calibration When calibration with an actual load is not performed configure the following settings e Set Tare zero offset Un G54 to Not used 1 e Perform two point zero calibration The two point span calibration is not performed peo jenjoe ue noy im pauwlojiad si UOI euqieo uayM y xipuaddy pasn si ue 1Bo1y souanbas e usym uone qijeo juod om y xipueddy 263 264 1 When using Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 to be stored is the value of 0 to 10000 after conversion from the analog signal of O mV V to Load cell rated output Un G52 When Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 is used set Tare zero offset Un G54 to Not used 1 and set the value according to the load cell that uses Load cell rated output Un G52 Thereafter set Two point calibration request Un G43 bO to The setting procedure is shown below Turn on Two point calibration mode switch request YA Check that the signals and the LED ar
201. ing the 10 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Item Description Type Select Intelli Model name Enter the model name of the module Points Select 16 points Start XY Enter the start I O number of the Q61LD Option 2 Intelligent function module switch setting The Q61LD does not use the intelligent function module switch If the intelligent function module switch is set using GX Developer an error may occur pasp si Jadojanag XH usu xipueddy 201 Appendix 4 Two point Calibration when a Sequence Program is Used Appendix 4 1 Setting and procedure The following figure shows the setting and procedure of two point calibration Two point calibration mode switching Turn on Two point calibration mode switch request YA Turn on Two point calibration mode status flag XA Check if Module ready X0 is turned off Check if RUN LED is blinking Enable conversion setting Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Enable conversion 0 Turn on off Operating condition setting request Y9 Two point calibration has been performed once Perform two point calibration with the actual load Configure two point setting value Move the scale YES Two point setting Set the following two points setting value Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 Load cell rated output Un G52
202. ingle CPU system Version 7 or later Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Version 8 or later Multiple CPU system Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HC_ Single CPU system PU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Version 1 140 or later Version 4 or later Version 6 or later Q02PH QO6PHCPU Version 8 68W or later Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Not available Q12PH Q25PHCPU Version 7 10L or later Multiple CPU system Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant CPU system Version 8 45X or later Single CPU system Q00UJ QG00U Q01UCPU Version 8 76E or later Multiple CPU system Q02U Q03UD Q04UDH Q06UD Single CPU system HCPU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Version 8 48A or later Q10UDH Q20UDHCPU Version 8 76E or later Multiple CPU system Version 1 140 or later Single CPU system Q13UDH Q26UDHCPU Version 8 620 or later Multiple CPU system QO3UDE Q04UDEH QO6UDEH Single CPU system Version 8 68W or later Q13UDEH Q26UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q10UDEH Q20UDEHCPU Version 8 76E or later Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q50UDEH Q100UDEHCPU Version 1 25B or later Not available Multiple CPU system When installing in a MELSECNET H remote I O station Version 1 34L or later Version 6 or later 2 2 When Using the Q61LD with Redundant CPU When using the Q61LD with Redundant CPU dedicated instructions cannot be used Nd9 JUepunpay YIM 7190 94 Burisn usym zz 21 2 3 Checking the Function Version and Serial N
203. int range O to 100 0 0 to 10 0 a Enabling the settings Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the settings b Default The default value is 100 10 0 Point O Values can be set in increments of 0 1 but is processed in units of Minimum division Un G58 rounded down at the minimum division O Ifa value outside the setting range is written an error occurs and the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence 131 sjiejoq geq Bumes 79 11 Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit value setting H Un G31 This setting is used to set the range in which a warning upper or lower limit alarm is caused The setting range is as follows Description Setting range Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Gross weight lower upper limit value setting 99999 to 99999 Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Gross weight upper upper limit value setting a Enabling the settings Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the settings b Default The default value is 0 Point O if Warning output disabled 1 is set to Warning output setting Un G20 b0 any value set in Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit
204. ion 1 again upon completion of the first conversion sjiejoq ejeg Bumes 79 147 40 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 148 Error detection results of an analog input load cell output and Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 are stored b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 Normal Excess of zero balance amendment Data for b4 to b15 are fixed to 0 Normal Excess of capacity Normal Input signal error Two point span calibration disable Excess of input valves to be converted 20 20 0 aO a Status of Input signal error detection flag Un1G 114 e When the range set in Input signal error detection setting Un G21 is exceeded Input signal error 1 is set e When 90 of Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 is exceeded Weighing capacity over 1 is set e When zero point adjustment is performed beyond the range set in Zero point range setting Un G22 starting from the zero point at two point calibration Outside the zero point range 1 is set e When an analog input exceeds the conversion range during setting Auto restoration 1 in Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 in normal mode or during operation in two point calibration mode Conversion over 1 is set e When the same occurs during setting Auto stop 0 in Conversion over automatic restoration setting Un G19 in normal mode an error occurs and an error code is store
205. ion Un G59 Unit Un G60 Set Write 1 to Two point setting Un G40 Turn on and off Two point setting request Y7 When something is placed on the weigh scale remove it Check that the scale indicates Okg Set Two point zero calibration enable 1 to Two point calibration setting Un G42 Set Two point Zero calibration requested 1 to Two point calibration request Un G43 Check that Two point zero calibration completion 1 is stored to Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 Set Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 2 Set User setting 1 to Two point calibration method setting Un G41 Set Write 1 to Two point setting Un G40 and turn on and off Two point setting request Y7 Set Two point calibration not requested 0 to Two point calibration request Un G43 Check that Two point calibration not requested 0 is stored to Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 Turn off Two point calibration mode switch request YA Check that the signals and LED are in the following status Two point calibration mode status flag XA OFF Module ready X0 ON RUN LED ON Configure the setting the same as when executing actual load calibration If the following condition is not satisfied an error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 Error flag XF turns on and conversion is processed with the settings before the error occurr
206. ion processing is not performed When a minor error occurs conversion processing is performed with the settings that the system operated normally last time The Q61LD uses only one channel Therefore there are two types of errors the errors unrelated to the channel and the errors related to the channel listed in the following tables respectively 22 ISI OPO JOU LL a Errors unrelated to the channel If the following errors occur the error codes are written to Latest error code Un G1790 The errors indicated as error codes 1 and 2 cannot be cleared even if Error clear request YF is turned on Error Error Ton f code i Description Corrective action eve decimal Power on and off the module again If the same error occurs the module may be in 1 Moderate A hardware error of the module failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative gt Mesa Set 0 to the Switch 5 in the intelligent function function module switch setting module switch setting of GX Developer To clear the error restore an analog input load cell output value to the one within the conversion range and turn on Error clear request YF If the error is not cleared check if the load cell connection cable is disconnected or cables are An analog input load cell output that exceeds the conversion wired improperly range is applied The cables that are not wired could be the cause of the error 99 Moderate If the
207. ion value L span calibration value Two point span calibration value L S 41 Two Two point span calibration value H span calibration value Two point span calibration value H nae System System area S 85 Setting is unnecessary If setting is configured the data will not be written properly 3 Function This function recovers the following data from the CPU module to a new Q61LD For the buffer memory areas whose data are to be recovered refer to the following e Dedicated instruction list 2 gt Page 240 Appendix 1 1 There are two types of interlock signals for the G P OGSTOR instruction completion device and completion status indication device D 1 a Completion device This device turns on at the END processing in the scan where the G P OGSTOR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Completion status indication device This device turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P OGSTORE instruction e Normal completion Remains off and does not change e Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing in the scan where the G P OGSTOR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing END END END END processing processing processing processing Sequence Program rm fr nnn ON Execution completion of the G P OGSTOR instruction G P OGSTOR OFF i instruction i i ON Completion device Tce ae LON
208. ion value Un G68 Un G69 Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 This setting is used to correct Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 The setting is used to correct zero point misalignment due to individual differences among load cells when Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 is used This setting does not affect Gross weight output value Un G100 UniG101 The setting range are as follows 32 bit signed binary e Zero calibration value 65536 to 65535 e Span calibration value 65536 to 65535 65 536 to 65 535 Digital output zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 and Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 can be calculated by the following formula Ose 02 Dine 103 x Span calibration value Zero correction value Ex 1 When Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 0 to 9800 is corrected to 0 to 10000 Because the correction value for 98000 is 200 the rate of Digital output span correction value Un G70 UniG71 is as follows 200 x 104 167 208 Accordingly Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 is 2041 2 041 Ex 2 When Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 200 to 10200 is corrected to 0 to 10000 Because the correction value is 200 Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 is 200 Ex 3 When Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 200 to 9800 is corrected to 0 to 10000 Because span range 9600 correspond to 10000 and the rate of Digital output span co
209. isk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series programmable controllers This manual describes the operating procedure system configuration parameter settings functions programming and troubleshooting of the Q61LD load cell input module hereafter abbreviated as Q61LD Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC Q series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to the actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems mMRelevant module Q61LD O Unless otherwise specified this manual describes the program examples in which the I O numbers of X Y0O0 to X YOF are assigned for the Q61LD For I O number assignment refer to the following
210. it Output an error code in BCD Error code output OFF Error clear request ON CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 5 Program example without using intelligent function module parameters a Initial setting for reading a gross weight output value X7 Y7 X9 Y9 U0 G43 0 U0 G43 1 U0 G148 0 EA xO PY gt EA MO XOF M40 MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV DMOV DMOV DMOV DMOV XO Y9 X9 HO H5 K10 K16 K2 K10 K2 K100 HO HO K50 K100 K 100 K 50 K2450 K2500 SET RST th y A RST M40 UO GO UO G1 UO G2 U0 G3 UO G4 UO G5 UO G6 UO G7 UO G19 UO G20 UO G21 UO G22 UO G24 UN G26 UN G28 U0 G30 Y9 MO Y9 Simultaneous request interlock Operating condition setting command ON Conversion enable Averaging processing method setting Count average setting Moving average setting Stable status range setting Stable status time setting Zero tracking range setting Zero tracking time setting Excess of input values to be converted Operation stop Warning output setting Enable Input signal error detection setting Zero point range setting Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Gross weight lower upper limit value setting Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Gross weight upper upper limit value setting Operating condition setting request ON Oper
211. ites the maximum and minimum digital output values to the buffer memory area values hold function Section 4 16 32 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Temporarily holds the gross weight output value and the digital output value Output value hold i i Page 106 While being held the output value will not change even if the load cell output voltage is i function Section 4 17 changed Default setting This command resets the values set in the buffer memory to the default values Page 107 registration function At the same time the zero correction value of zero point adjustment is cleared set to zero Section 4 18 1 As the data is stored in a non volatile memory FeRAM in the Q61LD the parameters set for these functions will not be erased even when the power is turned off js UOHOUNY ZE 33 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION This chapter describes the function details available with the Q61LD and the setting methods 4 1 General Characteristics of Load Cells This section describes the general characteristics of load cells 1 Notation of load cell output When a constant load is applied to the load cell the output voltage is proportional to the voltage applied to the load cell Accordingly the unit mV V is used to represent the load cell output level meaning the output voltage in mV per applied voltage of 1V Since the applied voltage from the Q61LD to the load cell is fixed at 5V the actual load cell output voltage will be 5mV when the o
212. ithin the range of 0 to 100 code decimal 1220 1221 1230 1231 1234 1235 1242 Description Error level al Minor upper limit value lt maximum weighing capacity setting value The value of Two point calibration request Un G43 is set to 3 Minor Minor Minor Minor Point A value set in Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit value setting H Un G31 is outside the range of 99999 to 99999 A value set in Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit value setting H Un G31 does not meet the condition lower lower limit value lt lower upper limit value lt upper lower limit value lt upper Two point span calibration is requested while two point zero calibration is requested Two point setting request Y7 is on while Two point calibration request Un G43 is being set Default setting registration command Un G148 is set to Default setting registration command 1 while Two point calibration request Un G43 is being set Two point calibration request Un G43 is set simultaneously when Default setting registration command Un G148 is set to Default setting registration command 1 The operations to be performed when multiple errors occur are as follows e If multiple errors related to the channel occur the error code of the error that occurred last is stored in Latest error
213. laced on the Setting on the scale upon two point span calibration i scale upon two point span calibration Satisfy the following conditions Standard lt Maximum weighing lt Load cell Number of load cells weight setting capacity setting rated capacity in connection If the above conditions are not satisfied two point span calibration will not be performed and the following status will result e An error will be registered in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 Calculating the two point span calibration value The formula is as follows Maximum weighing Load cell rated Factory default span Two point span _ Capacity setting output mV V setting value calibration value Load cell Number of load cells Instrumentation amplifier rated capacity in connection gain setting mV V 1 Set Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 to 1 0mV V 2 0mV V or 3 0mV V Depending on the value set for Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 different buffer memory areas will be referenced Assign the appropriate value to the formula by referring to the following buffer memory addresses Value set for Instrumentation amplifier gain i Buffer memory address to be referenced setting Un G80 0 3mV V lt Load cell rated output lt 1 0mV V 1 0mV V span calibration value Un G1616 Un G1617 1 0mV V lt Load cell
214. lation confirmation Click the button and perform the operation in gt Page 219 Section 10 8 3 After checking that the RUN LED of the module is off remove external connections and remove the module Always remove the module If installation confirmation is executed without actually removing the module the module will not start normally and the RUN LED will not turn on 218 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 3 Mounting a new module 1 Mount the new module to the same slot and connect Online Module Change f external wires m Operation r Target Module 2 Module Change 1 0 Address ODO After the module is secured in place click the Execution lL Y Module Name H Confirmation button and check that the RUN Status Module Control eE LED turns on Module ready X0 remains off Festart Status fGuidance The module can be exchanged Please press the next button after installing a new module e E a a Cancel 4 Checking the operation 1 To check the operation click the Online Module Change button to cancel the start of control Operation Target Module Module Change 1 0 Address poog Execution M61L0 Installation Module Name R Confirmation Status g Module Control Change Module Installation Completion Restart ShatusGuidance The controls such as IO FROMITO instruction executions and automatic refresh For the installed module are restarted
215. le 1 and set Default setting registration command Un G148 to Default setting registration command 1 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 13 Checking the Q61LD status using system monitor of GX Works2 The LED status and the setting status of the intelligent function module switch can be checked by selecting Q61LD H W information on the GX Works2 system monitor 1 H W information a H W LED information The LED lighting status is displayed LED name Lighting status RUN LED 0000 Indicates that the LED is off ERR LED 0001 y Indicates that the LED is on 0000y and 0001 y is displayed alternately Indicates that the ALM LED LED is flashing b H W switch information The setting status of the intelligent function module switch is displayed The Q61LD does not require the intelligent function module switch setting H W Information Monitor Status Module Product Information 20920000000000 Model Mame O61LD Display Format DEC Hiv Sw Information Item value Buooys jqnoJIL ZL Stop Monitor ZSHIOM X9 JO J0 uow Wejshs Hulsn snje s 97190 ay BurjoeyD EL Z LL 239 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Dedicated Instructions 1 Dedicated instruction list The following table lists dedicated instructions available for the Q61LD Instruction Description Reads the following data into the CPU module e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 e Load cell rated output Un G52 e Number of loa
216. le disable setting Un GO to display it 7 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Modify Value Conversion disable 1 Device Label Buffer Memory 8 Turn on Operating condition setting request Y9 Cevice Label 9 9 Check Conversion completion flag Un G113 to Data Type Bit confirm that the conversion is stopped and turn off E Operating condition setting request Y9 Settable Range Execution Result lt lt Execution Result Device Label Data Type Setting Value Bit OFF Bit GN GN Reflect to Input Column Delete 10 If the content of the buffer memory has not been recorded beforehand record the content by referring to the following procedures 11 to 14 11 Set Two point setting Un G40 to Read 0 12 Turn on Two point setting request Y7 13 After checking that Two point setting completion flag X7 is off turn off Two point setting request Y7 14 Record the content of the save restoration settings Save Restoration Setting List 2 gt Page 222 Section 10 9 ajge eneupn si wua s s Jeyjouy u yM vonouny uoyelnbiyuos y Ag 1as ae SJBJOWeIeY U YUM Z OL 211 2 Removing the module System Monitor Monitor Status Connection Channel List System Image Stop Monitor Serial Port NET 10 H Remote Module Conmection RS 232C C System Monitor Online Module Change Main Base Operation to Selected Module E Main Base Main Base VO Adr 0
217. load cell specification limit 43 pasn zou SI UONOUNJ jasyo 019Z SJE ay U YM VEP coran ZOLD UN anjea mdino jeppa pue LOLS UN OOLS UN anjer mdino juBbiem sso19 jo vonelado p 4 3 2 When the tare zero offset function is used 44 This section describes the system operation when the tare zero offset function is used When using the tare zero offset function set Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 properly 1 Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 will be O at the input load of the two point zero calibration ZERO point and will be the maximum weighing capacity value at the input load of the two point span calibration SPAN point For details on the two point zero calibration and two point span calibration refer to Page 60 Section 4 8 2 Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 Do not use this value although it will change proportionally to the load The accuracy is not guaranteed Load on the load cell kg CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 3 Outline of Processing Ex This section describes the outline of the setting and processing when the weight of 300kg is measured using four load cells under the following conditions The fixed tare weight is assumed to be 600kg e Rated capacity 300kg e Rated output 1 2mV V Description Setting value Load cell rated capacity 3000 300 0kg Load cell rated output 12 1 2mV Number of load cel
218. ls in connection 4 Maximum weighing capacity setting 3000 300 0kg Decimal point position 14 x 10 Fixed tare weight EN 600 0kg e Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 For the load cell load of 600 0kg to 900 0kg the output value of O to 3000 maximum weighing capacity will be produced Load cell rated capacity 300kg x 4 TOO a ec y Span Fixed tare weighing capacity Point 900 0f 7777777777777777 l Zero l Fixed tare point 210600 lt a naaa 300 0 Load cell rated output 0 0 Load cell output mV V 0 0 0 4 i 08 1 2 1 6 2 0 i 103 02 3 0 6 mV mV MVA 2 U7 a ye l P P E we lt Q Zero offset output value 0 6 mV V L Io ss Input value after zero offset mV V 0 6 0 0 0 3 0 6 n ON ae A D converter gain 4 times N S S ea o 2 4 0 6x4 s x S 0 3mV V x4 SESE SS SSS Input value after multiplication mV V 1 2 0 34 2 309 2 A ee Se Gross weight output value x 10 kg 3000 6000 4 Do not load anymore 4 As the fixed tare weight corresponds to 0 6mV V it is offset by 0 6mV V by the tare zero offset output value 2 Since Load cell rated output Un G52 is 1 2mV V while the load cell output from ZERO point to SPAN point is 0 3mV V the A D converter gain of 4 times is the optimum value 3 Although the load cell can be loaded up to the level of 1 2mV V output corresponding to 2 4mV
219. lue 1 ee eens 73 4 8 4 When calibration is performed without an actual load o oooooooo o 74 4 9 Weight Conversion Method 82 4 10 Zero Tracking FUNCION 2 42 acordar eet heb ete ride ad bee ena bla Bete ara 86 4 11 Zero Set Reset Function 0 02 62 ec eee bee eee wee eee 89 4 12 Input Signal Error Detection Function 0 0 0 0 0000 eee 91 4 12 1 Operation upon input signal error by the status of Conversion over automatic restoration setting UMTS serra prp Seo Meee e Btu hao Boks 96 4 13 Warning Output FUNCOM renacido 100 4 14 Center Point 1 4 scale Detection Functi0N o o oooooooooooo eee 102 A E A A a eh eae 105 4 16 Maximum and Minimum Values Hold Function 00 000 cece eee eee 106 4 17 Output Value Hold Function o o o o oo ee eee eee eee 106 4 18 Default Setting Registration Function 20 0 0 cc eee 107 CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS SENT TO FROM CPU MODULE 109 SA WO SIN SUS iaa raid bogs e ha Cee MOREE Rhea eee 109 52 VO Signal Detalla oct hee E ee ee oe ee Pace ae oe 110 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 118 6 4 B fe Memon ls ratas rs ida donnie ee cad ose ds Ree T 118 62 Setting Data DetallS asustarse RES ade ees 126 CHAPTER 7 PROCEDURES AND SETTINGS BEFORE SYSTEM OPERATION 153 Tol Handling Precautions ce aia li ti ia a tia eRe ae 153 2 Procedure Before Operation munici its 154 LS PamNameStz to rada PARE bl a dt arta 155 TA Ll nn Sai Paes ie waa ee
220. lue before replacement x Correction factor 1 Correction factor The following equation is used to calculate the correction factor Factory default span setting Factory default span setting Correction _ 1 value of replaced module value of replacing module x A D converter gain setting factor o Factory default span setting value of replacing module a Factory default span calibration value For the factory default span calibration value the buffer memory address to be referenced depends on the setting value of Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 Assign the appropriate value to the formula by referring to the following buffer memory addresses Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 value Buffer memory address to be referenced 0 3mV V lt Load cell rated output lt 1 0mV V 0p 1 0mV V span calibration value Un G1616 Un G1617 1 0mV V lt Load cell rated output lt 2 0mV V 1p 2 0mV Y span calibration value Un G1620 Un G1621 2 0mV V lt Load cell rated output lt 3 0mV V 2 4 3 0mV V span calibration value Un G1624 Un G1625 b A D converter gain setting Substitute the value of A D converter gain setting Un G81 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 times 224 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes the errors that could be detected by the Q61LD and also describes troubleshooting 11 1 Error Code List This section describes the error codes that could be gener
221. mber to mount the Q61LD Mount Position Set the start I O number in hex number corresponding to the mounted slot Specify start XY address l number It is also allowed to manually set the number Title Setting Title Set an appropriate title of your choice g 159 8 2 Parameter Setting Use the Parameter window to set various parameters 1 Setting method The parameters are set in the Parameter window 1 Startup Parameter D Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module Name gt Parameter Y 0000 061 LD Parameter Display Filter Display All Me Item Basic setting Set the conversion system Conversion enable disable setting 1 Disable Averaging processing method setting Count average setting Moving average setting Stable status range setting Items input to the text box able status time setting Zero tracking range setting Zero tracking time setting Stop restoration settinafUsable y t9 Sto Item selected from the pull down list ater than produc Warning output function ey Warning output setting warning LEMA output E E tate Warning output setting input signal error detection Input signal error detection setting 5 0 Zero point range setting 10 0 Gross weight lower lower limit o value setting Gross weight lower upper limit value setting Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Gross weight upper upper limit value setting 5 Combination Use
222. minal Internal current consumption 5VDC External dimensions Weight Analog input range Specification 1 point 1 channel 0 0 to 3 3mV V 5VDC 5 output current within GOMA four 350Q load cells can be connected in parallel 6 wire type combined use of remote sensing method and ratiometric method 32 bit signed binary O to 10000 32 bit signed binary 99999 to 99999 Excluding any decimal point or unit symbol 0 0 to 3 0mV V 0 3 to 3 2mV V 0 0 to 1 0mV V 0 0 to 2 0mV V 0 0 to 3 0mV V Module Digital output Gross weight Maximum Load cell analog input value output value resolution rated output value 0 to 1 0mV V 0 to 5 0mV V 0 5uV 0 to 2 0mV V 0 to 10 0mV V O to 10000 99999 to 99999 1 0uV 0 to 3 0mV V O to 15 0mV V 1 5uV Nonlinearity Within 0 01 FS ambient temperature 25 C Zero drift Within 0 254V PC RTI Gain drift Within 15ppm C 10ms 0 4s or less 0 to 90 2 5V Maximum 101 times Photocoupler isolation Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply SOOVAC 1 minute Between input terminal and programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or more 16 points I O assignment intelligent 16 points 18 point terminal block 0 3 to 0 75mm R1 25 3 Sleeved solderless terminals cannot be used 0 48A 98 H x 27 4 W x 90 D mm 0 17kg 4 The unit mV V applies to the rated output voltage of load cells Because 5VDC is supplied to load cells from the Q61LD
223. ming two point calibration check the environment of the weighing machine Check that no load is applied on the scale such as an object making contact with the scale electric wires or air tubing Before performing two point calibration power on and warm up the Q61LD system for at least 15 minutes In case of a failure of the module document the buffer memory data used for the two point calibration If any error is present when the two point calibration has been completed the two point setting value and two point calibration value are not saved in the non volatile memory device FeRAM in the Q61LD Perform two point calibration again only after checking the error code and taking corrective actions Even in the two point calibration mode the gross weight output value and digital output value are written to and saved in the respective buffer memory areas as in the case of the normal mode However the output value will not be converted to the correct gross weight output value until the two point calibration is completed CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 8 2 Setting method The following flow charts shows the settings and procedures of two point calibration If a sequence program is to be used for two point calibration refer to the following e Two point Calibration when a Sequence Program is Used lt Page 252 Appendix 4 1 When two point calibration is performed for the first time Set two point setting value L 3 Page 64 Section 4
224. module change Pow i None None None None None None None rsu QO6BPHCPU gent 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt 16pt Status B Module system error O Module error E Module warming a Module change Manta Diagnostics gt Online module change 2 Select Online module change in Mode and double click the module to be changed online AATA m AATA m button to make the module 3 Click the ian Online module change rE Operation Target module rep laceable Module change execution 1 0 address 000H y a Module name Q61LD Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Change module selection completed Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Cancel 4 Ifthe following error window is displayed the target buffer memory data cannot be saved for backup For details on the target buffer memory refer to Save Restoration Setting List gt Page 222 Section 10 9 MELSOFT series GA Developer The target module didn t respond The task iz advanced ta the Installation confirmation gjqeyiene ou s wua s s Jayjoue u yM 9 G xipuaddy pasn si Jadojarnag XH u yM eBueuyo snpoyy suuo G xipueddy 5 Click the perform the operation in gt Page 280 Appendix 5 6 3 6 After checking that the RUN LED of the module is off remove external connectio
225. mperature Gain drift 10000digit x 15ppm C x At e Integrated accuracy A Change of the ambient temperature Integrated accuracy Nonlinear accuracy Zero drift x At Gain drift x At Point O Zero drift can be automatically corrected by using the zero tracking function e Zero Tracking Function lt _ gt Page 86 Section 4 10 Even when the tare zero offset function is used to expand the input range the accuracy is guaranteed only with reference to the load cell rated output 30 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1 3 Number of parameters Regarding the initial setting and auto refresh setting for the Q61LD the number of parameters to be set must not exceed the maximum number of parameters that can be set with the CPU module including the parameters of other intelligent function modules For the maximum number of parameters allowed to be set with the CPU module refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 1 Number of parameters with the Q61LD The following number of parameters can be set for each Q61LD Target module Initial setting Auto refresh setting a6ILD 14 Max 2 How to check The number of parameters set as well as the maximum number of parameters that can be set in an intelligent function module can be checked by the following operation procedures Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click Intelligent Function Module Par
226. n Un G58 m Minimum division Un G58 Point This function can be used to check the zero point when zero point adjustment is performed For details on zero point adjustment refer to the following e Zero Set Reset Function lt gt Page 89 Section 4 11 Ex When Minimum division Un G58 of 5 is selected and n 10 Center point status X2 turns on when Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is within 10 1 25 5 4 1 25 102 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 1 Setting method 1 Select the module to be used and click the Module Selection Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting ES Module Selection button Module Type OS O Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt 0000 O61LD Analog Module gt Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting Cancel 2 Click the button Two Point Calibration Setting 0000 061LD Set two point calibration setting When you use the scale for the first time or scale installation site has been changed please specify the scale initial setting Without the Scale Initial Setting the following settings cannot work appropriately When scale installation site was changed from the site where the two point calibration was performed gravitational acceleration needs to be corrected Please set the installation site Installation Site Setting When correcting the two point calibration setting values please set the scale correction setting Scale
227. n G105 Minimum gross weight output value Un G106 Un G107 e The maximum and minimum values of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 are stored in 32 bit signed binary every sampling cycle 10ms e Even if averaging processing is set the maximum and minimum values are stored every sampling cycle 10ms e The stored values are cleared if Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off or if Maximum and minimum values reset request YD is turned on 38 Maximum digital output value Un G108 Un G109 Minimum digital output value Un G110 Un G111 e The maximum and minimum values of Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 are stored in 32 bit signed binary e The stored values are reset to the present values if Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off or if Maximum and minimum values reset request YD is turned on 39 Conversion completion flag Un G113 Conversion status can be confirmed b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO jojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo S SY Data for b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Conversion stop 1 Conversion completed e Upon completion of the first conversion after conversion permission is given Conversion completion 1 is set e Conversion completion signal XE is turned on upon completion of conversion When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off the signal returns to default 0 and is set to Conversion complet
228. n failed 1 Remove error causes and set Two point calibration request Un G43 b1 to Two point span calibration requested 1 again For details on the error causes refer to the following e TROUBLESHOOTING 7 Page 225 CHAPTER 11 Two points calibration mode Y status flag XA Two points calibration Automatic seting Om method setting Un G41 Automatic setting OH eet 1 Two points span calibration enabled 1 Two points calibration Two points span calibration request Un G43 b1 Secon xe l l Two points span calibration 7 value Un G86 Un G87 p j Two points calibration sa Y completion flag Un G143 b1 A e 1 Executed by the Q61LD Executed in a sequence program Point O After Two point calibration request Un G43 b1 is set to Two point span calibration requested 1 do not change the actual load standard weight placed on the weighing machine until Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 b1 turns to Two point span calibration completion 1 O In the two point span calibration use the analog input load cell output in the range of 0 3mV V to 3 0mV V 256 APPENDICES Appendix 4 2 Program example for two point calibration This section describes a program example for two point calibration 1 System configuration W WN W O O O C N O A number of connecting load cells Three load cells Load cell rated output 2 0mV V Load cell rated capacities 300 0kg L
229. n over 1 Input signal error available only in the normal mode This notification will be provided when the input signal level exceeds a level arbitrarily specified by the user separately from weighing capacity over a Occurrence of input signal error When Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 satisfies the following condition Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b2 will be set to Input signal error 1 Gross weight output value y Maximum weighing Maximum weighing Input signal error Un G100 Un G101 capacity setting capacity setting detection setting o However the conversion of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 will continue b Clearing the input signal error After Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 has returned to a normal value turn on and off Error clear request YF When the input signal error is cleared it will result in the following status e Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b2 is set to Normal 0 e Input signal error detection signal XC turns off e The ALM LED turns off 2 Weighing capacity over available only in the normal mode This notification will be provided when the load on the scale exceeds the maximum weighing capacity uoouny uonoa 2q 10113 jeus yndu Zt a Occurrence of weighing capacity over When Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 exceeds 90 of the Maximum weighing capacity se
230. n the gross weight output value falls within a predefined range a warning will be produced This function can be used only in the normal mode Gross weight output value Gross weight upper upper limit value setting Gross weight upper lower limit value setting Gross weight lower upper limit value setting Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Warning output flag Un G115 b1 Warning output flag Un G115 b0 Normal 0 Normal 0 Normal 0 Warning output signal X8 Interval for warning output range Interval for warning output out of range 1 Occurrence and clearing of warning a Occurrence of warning Under the following conditions a warning will be issued in increments of the value set in Minimum division Un G58 gt Page 64 Section 4 8 2 3 e When the value is larger than Gross weight upper upper limit value setting Un G30 Un G31 or when the value is smaller than Gross weight lower lower limit value setting Un G24 Un G25 and thus it is within the warning output range When a warning has been issued the status of the Q61LD will be as follows e The bits corresponding to the upper and lower limit values of Warning output flag Un G115 will be set to Alarm ON 1 e Warning output signal X8 turns on e The ALM LED turns on Ex When Minimum division Un G58 is set to 10 and Gross weight upper upper limit value setting Un G30 Un G31 is set to 1005 The upper l
231. n the tare zero offset function is not used This section describes the operation of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 for the case the tare zero offset function is not used 1 Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 will be O at the input load of the two point zero calibration ZERO point and will be the maximum weighing capacity value at the input load of the two point span calibration SPAN point For details on the two point zero calibration and two point span calibration refer to gt Page 60 Section 4 8 2 Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 Digital output value Un G102 UniG 103 is the output of the conversion process to convert the analog input from the load cell to the corresponding digital data where the unloaded level output OmV V to the load cell rated output is converted to the output data of O to 10000 When setting under the following conditions e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 100kg e Load cell rated output Un G52 2 0mV V e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 4 e Fixed tare weight 45kg e Tare weight 10kg Digital output value 8500 4 4500 0 0 45 55 85 100 Load kg 0 0 0 9 1 1 1 7 2 0 Output mV V 40 1 No load 2 Fixed tare only 3 Fixed tare tare 4 Fixed tare tare subject e fo Load on the load cell kg O wh
232. nce of gravitational acceleration that may be present if Gravitational acceleration Page 56 the calibration site of the weighing machine differs from its installation site Section 4 7 a 4 O anon The setting is unnecessary if the calibration site is same as the installation site To use the Q61LD as a weighing machine this function performs necessary adjustments to Two point calibration work with the load cell Page 60 function To accurately calibrate the gross weight output value an actual load standard weight is puton Section 4 8 the load cell One of the following processing is made to the gross weight output value and the digital output value to reduce fluctuations in the output value Weight conversion e Sampling processing Page 82 method e Count average processing Section 4 9 e Moving average processing e Combination use of count average and moving average Automatically corrects for any slow zero drifts or sensitive zero point fluctuations Page 86 Zero tracking function have Time and variation width are the parameters to be set for this function Section 4 10 Adjusts the zero point of the weighing machine Page 89 Zero set reset function This adjustment assumes the case where the zero point of the weighing machine has moved cion a after a two point calibration e Weighing capacity over When the division nine of the full scale maximum weighing capacity setting is exceeded the Weighing capacity ov
233. nd turn off Address fo HE Operating condition setting request Y9 off to on Check Conversion completion flag Un G113 to Setting value fi DEC 16 bit integer Set Program Label reference program Execution history Find Y9 EE Force OFF Force ON Find nest Module start 0 Addrez 0 H 1 a Resetting Clear 212 APPENDICES 2 Removing the module 1 Open the System Monitor window System Monitor Installed status Base Base Module a O Diagnostics gt Online module change 2 Select Online Module Change in Mode and double click the module to be changed online CA AX Erai i Im Parameter status Mode SEA 70 Address o to 20 30 40 50 60 70 AAA E System monitor EXP Online module change Status a Module system error E Module error O Module warning Ol Module change button to make the module Online module change 3 Click the Operation r Target module replaceable Module change execution 170 address OOOH i Module name GEIL Installation confirmation Statue Module control restart Change module selection completed Status Guidance Please turn off signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module 4 Ifthe following error window is displayed the target buffer memory data cannot be saved for backup For details on the target buffer memory areas refer
234. nection Test PLC Type Remotel O Detail System Image Phone Line Connection C24 Cancel CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Continued Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device wi n d OW Device Name acko es 0 ar jos El DO Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Modify Yalue Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Ba tch Address FIE D C B 4 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 E sJotolotolototelolotofoto ollo 5 6 Enter the buffer memory address of Conversion 2 10 000000000 0 0850p 0 10 enable disable setting Un G0 to display it at 7 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Modify Value Conversion disable 1 Device Label Buffer Memory 8 Device Label ra 9 Check Conversion completion flag Un G113 to Turn on Operating condition setting request Y9 Data Type eit y confirm that the conversion is stopped and turn off on GRE Operating condition setting request Y9 m Settable Range Execution Result lt lt Execution Result Data Type Bik Bit Bit Reflect to Input Column Delete a qe 1eny si wua s s Jeyjouy u yM UONOUNY UOIeINBIWUOD y Ag jas due siajaweleg uaym GOL 199 2 Removing the module System Monitor Monitor Status Connection Channel List System Image Stop Monitor Serial Port NET 10 H Remote Module Connecti
235. ng Un G5 can be set in increments of 100ms Note that however it is actually processed with a shift of 10ms x Count average setting Un G2 time required for storing Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 in the buffer memory from the time setting Ex When the following setting is configured e Stable status time setting Un G5 1 e Count average setting Un G2 5 100ms 100ms Stable status time setting e p cae Un G5 gt 10ms x Count average setting i Un G2 otd d i Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the settings a Enabling the settings b Default The default value is 0 Point If a value outside the setting range is written an error occurs and the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence 128 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 6 Zero tracking range setting Un G6 Zero tracking time setting Un G7 This setting is used for automatically correcting a zero point that has been changed due to a temperature change foreign matter adherence on a weighing machine or other such reasons after two point calibration Zero tracking ranges are set for Gross weight output value Un G100 UniG101 The setting range is as follows For details on the zero tracking function refer to the following e Zero Tracking Function 2 gt
236. ng condition setting command XOA y9 x9 oe tH a A RST 9 Operating condition setting request OFF X18 XO XOA XOF M40 VO YA HA MOV HO G40 Two point setting Read SET M52 Two point calibration value reading flag SET Y7 Two point setting request ON XO X0A Y7 X7 l _44 fest v7 Two point setting request OFF XO X0A Y7 X7 M52 VO a MOVP G80 D80 Instrumentation amplifier gain setting UN zz Oo O MOVP G81 D81 A D converter gain setting oo gt J UN e 2 DMOVPG82 D82 Weighing platform weight zero offset x Xx output value RA UN oo N y DMOVPG84 D84 Two point zero calibration value v O UN ee Su DMOVPG86 D86 Two point span calibration value es 32 RST M52 Two point calibration value reading flag 2 O Q r XOF UN 33 BCD G1800 K4Y20 Output an error code in BCD ov o o XOF J5 BCD KO K4Y20 Error code output OFF 7 2 3 3 xoc X19 S 2 YOF Error clear request ON Ow 2 wm XOF 5 0 O O o END oS a o U 39 Q r o Point If module change is presumed after completion of two point calibration it is recommended to save Two point calibration c value Un G80 to Un G87 to the CPU file register or latch area using the G P OGLOAD instruction 2 e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 261 b Writing two point calibration values
237. ns and remove the module Point Always remove the module If installation confirmation is executed without actually removing the module the module will not start normally and the RUN LED will not turn on 279 280 3 Mounting a new module Online module change m Operation Module change execution Installation confirmation Module control restart Status Guidance The module can be exchanged m Target module 140 address 000H 2 Module name Q61LD Status Changing module Please press the Execute button after installing a new module Cancel Mount the new module to the same slot and connect external wires After the module is secured in place click the button and check that the RUN LED turns on Module ready X0 remains off 4 Checking the operation Online module change Operation y Target module Module change execution 1 0 address ODOH f da Module name Q61LD Installation confirmation m Status Module control restart Change module installation completion Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute Execution MELSOFT series GX Developer The online module change mode is stopped Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not
238. ns off when a watchdog timer error occurs 2 Stable status X1 This signal can be used in every mode a On condition This signal turns on in the following status e The variation range of a value stored in Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 becomes within the range set to Stable status range setting Un G4 and the status remains longer than the period set to Stable status time setting UniG5 b Off condition This signal turns off in the following status e When the variation range and setting range of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 are compared at each sampling cycle the variation range exceeds the setting range 3 Center point status X2 This signal can be used in every mode a On condition This signal turns on in the following status e Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is within the range of a center point 1 4 of the value set to Minimum division Un G58 110 CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS SENT TO FROM CPU MODULE 4 Output value hold status flag X3 Output value hold request Y3 e When Output value hold request Y3 is turned on the following output values are held and Output value hold status flag X3 turns on e Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 e Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 e Maximum gross weight output value L Un G104 to Minimum gross weight output value H Un G107 e While Output value hold request Y3 is on the above output values ar
239. nstallation Confirmation m Target Module JO Address ODO Module Mame b1LD m Status Module Control Change Module Selection Completed Restart Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent Function module Please press next button when you are ready Point Open the System Monitor window of the remote I O station DO Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Select Online Module Change in Mode and double click the module to be changed online peteeaeesnagsenseesaeeseesaeeseesseeaey Click the Execute button to make the module Mennnnnn a Pee eee O a replaceable If the following error window is displayed the target buffer memory data cannot be saved for backup For details on the target buffer memory refer to Save Restoration Setting List 2 gt Page 222 Section 10 9 MELSOFT Application y The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation Click the button and perform the operation in gt Page 207 Section 10 6 3 After checking that the RUN LED of the module is off remove external connections and remove the module Always remove the module If installation confirmation is executed without actually removing the module the module will not start normally and the RUN LED will not turn on 206 3 Mounting a new module Online Module Ch
240. nt adjustment exceeds the range set by Zero point range setting Un G22 with reference to the ZERO point set in the two point calibration the following status will result e Input signal error detection signal XC turns on e Input signal error detection flag Un G114 bO is set to Outside the zero point range 1 e The ALM LED flashes b Clearing of Outside the zero point range When Error clear request YF is turned on after Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 has been returned to within the setting range the following status will result e Input signal error detection signal XC turns off e Input signal error detection flag Un G114 bO returns to Normal 0 e The ALM LED turns off 3 Setting method a Zero set Set Zero point adjustment request Un G45 b0 to Zero set requested 1 b Zero reset Set Zero point adjustment request Un G45 b1 to Zero reset requested 1 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 12 Input Signal Error Detection Function This function detects errors of the analog signal supplied from outside the programmable controller When an error is detected Input signal error detection signal XC turns on and the ALM LED starts flashing Also the bit corresponding to the error of Input signal error detection flag Un G114 will be turned on This function can detect the following four types of input signal errors e Input signal error e Weighing capacity over e Outside the zero point range e Conversio
241. ntation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 1 These are the conditions where no error occurs even though a corresponding setting request Two point calibration setting request Y7 or Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on and off The setting change is ignored and the value in the buffer memory remains the same as the one before the request 2 These are the conditions where an error occurs when Two point calibration setting request Y7 is turned on and off if a setting is outside the setting range The setting change is ignored and the value in the buffer memory remains the same as the one before the request CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 Troubleshooting 11 2 1 When the RUN LED turns off Check item Corrective action Check that the supply voltage of the power supply module is within the Is power supplied rated range Calculate the current consumption of each module mounted on the base Is the capacity of the power supply module sufficient unit and make sure that the capacity of the power supply module is sufficient Reset the CPU module and check that the RUN LED turns on Has a watchdog timer error occurred If the RUN LED does not turn on the module may be in failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi represe
242. ntative Are the modules mounted correctly on the base unit Check the module mounting status Refer to the chapter explaining the online module change and take Is the module in the online module change enable status l corrective actions gt Page 192 CHAPTER 10 Page 268 Appendix 5 11 2 2 When the RUN LED flashes Check item Corrective action Turn off Two point calibration mode switch request YA to switch the mode Is the module in the two point calibration mode to the normal mode 11 2 3 When the ERR LED flashes BunooysalqnolL Z Check item Corrective action Is the setting value of the intelligent function module switch 5 other than 0 Set 0 for the intelligent function module switch 5 in GX Developer HO SUN 431 NN 84 USUYM LC LL 11 2 4 when the ERR LED turns on Check item Corrective action Check the error code and take corrective actions Has an error occurred Error Code List lt gt Page 227 Section 11 1 4 235 11 2 5 when the ALM LED flashes Check item Corrective action Check Input signal error detection flag Un G114 If Outside the zero point range is shown remove foreign matters or perform zero reset and check the shift range from the ZERO point For other types of errors check the wiring and input voltage Has an input signal error occurred 11 2 6 When the ALM LED turns on Check item Corrective action Has a warning upper or lower limit alarm o
243. nverter gain setting 0 5 Rated capacities Un 50 Un G51 x Connection numbers Un G53 eet For details on A D converter gain setting Un G81 refer to 2 gt Page 144 Section 6 2 31 When setting under the following conditions e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 3000 300 0kg e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 4 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 2000 200 0kg Select the highest possible A D converter gain setting Un G81 on condition that the following conditions are satisfied 200 300 x4 x A D converter gain setting Un G81 0 5 In this case due to the relationship of 1 gt 0 166 x A D converter gain setting Un G81 gt 0 5 the resulting A D converter gain setting Un G81 will be 4 times c Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 Calculate the optimum value based on the following setting For details on Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 refer to 2 Page 145 Section 6 2 32 e Set A D converter gain setting Un G81 to x1 01 e Set Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 to 0 e Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 including the actual fixed tare load Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 Rated output Zero offset output value _ due to the fixed tare y Un G52 o Besa Un G82 Un G83 A 1154771 Maximum input mV V when Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 is set 2 4 This is the calculated digital output v
244. o point calibration method setting Un G41 e Two point calibration setting Un G42 js SPO9 10113 LLL e Two point calibration request Un G43 e Zero point adjustment request Un G45 e Default setting registration Un G48 233 234 a Setting data not activated regardless Condition of the setting change e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 e Load cell rated output Un G52 e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 e Tare zero offset Un G54 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 e Decimal point position Un G59 e Unit Un G60 Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 e Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Rated capacities Connection numbers Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G50 Un G51 Un G53 di Un G80 Un G65 Settings that do not satisfy the following conditions in the case of two point calibration by user setting Capacity setting A D converter gain setting Un G56 Un G57 X Rated output mV x Un G81 e Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Set the values corresponding to 1 2 4 8 16 and 32 times for Un G67 A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Digital output zero correction value Un G68 Set Op for 1 0mV V 1y for 2 0mV V and 2y for 3 0mV V for Un G69 Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e Digital output span correction value Un G70 UniG71 e Instrume
245. o point span calibration is performed the installation site gravitational acceleration value is automatically registered as the calibration site gravitational acceleration value For the procedures of two point span calibration refer to the following e Two point Calibration Function lt Page 60 Section 4 8 The correction equation in the module is as follows Un G100 Un G101 before correction Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 08 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 When the installation site is changed At the installation site of the weighing machine set Installation Site Gravitational Acceleration again 1 Select the module for which the installation site of Module Selection Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting X oo the weighing machine has been changed and click Module Selection di anman o000 Q61LD O Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Analog Module gt Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting Cancel 2 Click the button Two Point Calibration Setting 0000 Q61LD Set two point calibration setting When you use the scale for the first time or scale installation site has been changed please specify the scale initial setting Scale Initial Setting Without the Scale Initial Setting the following settings cannot work appropriately When scale installation site was changed from the site where the two point calibration was performed
246. oad cell Load cell ii Load cell vinnie Load cell km QX10 X10 to X1F Q61LD X Y0 to X YF L y e M S a 2 Two point setting value Setting Buffer memory Description Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 3000 Set 300 0kg Load cell rated output Un G52 0 Set 2 0mV V N O I I I lt D oO Number of load cells in connection Un G53 Set 3 modules Tare zero offset Un G54 Use the tare zero offset function Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 3000 Set 300 0kg Minimum division Un G58 Set 0 1kg Decimal point position Un G59 Set x 1071 first decimal place Unit Un G60 Set kg Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 3000 Set 300 0kg UOI eIged juiod OM JO ajduexa wuelbolg Zp xipueddy pasn si ue1Bo1y souanbas e usym UOHeIqiesd JUIOd OM y xipueddy 201 3 Devices used by users Device Function x x x a flag XA Xc T Q61LD X Y0 to X YF x vr E a request YF reading Y20 to Y2F Error code display 4 digits in BCD QY10 Y20 to Y2F D80 Instrumentation amplifier gain setting D81 A D converter gain setting D82 D83 Tare zero offset output value D84 D85 Two point zero calibration value D86 D87 Two point span calibration value MO Operating condition setting command M40 Simultaneous request interlock M41 Two point calibration interlock M50 Two point calibration start flag M51 T
247. occurrence time o Day of 70Cy 1804 Second J the week ADH 1805 Md History 2 Error code Error occurrence 714 1809 Data structure is the same as History 1 M24 1810 History 3 Error code Error occurrence 716 1814 Data structure is the same as History 1 Ne 1815 History 4 Error code Error occurrence 71By 1819 Data structure is the same as History 1 122 Address Hex H 71C4 7204 72144 7254 7264 72Ay 72By 72Fy 7304 7344 7354 7394 73Ay 73Ey 73Fy 7434 7444 7484 7494 74D4 74E 7524 7534 7574 7584 75Cy 75Dy 7614 1820 1824 1825 1829 1830 1834 1835 1839 1840 1844 1845 1849 1850 1854 1855 1859 1860 1864 1865 1869 1870 1874 1875 1879 1880 1884 1885 1889 Data type es a Description History 5 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 6 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 7 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 8 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 9 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 10 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 11 Error code Error occurrence time Data structure is the same as History 1 History 12 Error code Error occurrence time
248. of Count Average and Moving Average 1 Input signal error detection disable 0 0 0 This area is used to set whether to stop behavior or automatically restore when conversion over occurs 2 Double click on the item to be set and enter the parameter value e Text box entry Double click on the item to be set and enter the numerical value e Entry from pull down list Double click on the item to show the pull down list and select a desired item 160 CHAPTER 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS Item ss Settingvalue value Reference E a Enable Page 49 Conversion enable disable setting 1 Disable Section 4 4 e 0 Sampling Processing e 2 Count Average Averaging processing method setting e 3 Moving Average e 5 Combination Use of Count Average and Page 82 Section 4 9 Moving Average O to 100 a division Page 105 O to 100 Zero tracking range setting x 1 4 of Minimum division Page 86 Section 4 10 Usable later than product e 1 Auto Restoration Section 4 12 e 1 Warning Output Disabled Warning output setting input signal error detection ele Ane oT error detection disable Bulnes Jajaweleg 78 161 8 3 Auto Refresh Setting This setting is used to transfer buffer memory data to a specified device 1 Setting method The setting is made in the Auto_ Refresh window 1 Start up Auto_Refresh DO Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module Name gt Auto_Refresh
249. of which rated capacity is the rated capacity of each load cell times the number of load cells connected as the load is distributed across the load cells The example assumes the following load cell specifications e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 1000kg e Load cell rated output Un G52 3 0mV V e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 As in the figure below e Applied voltage 5V Output mV V 1 connected 2 connected 3 connected 4 connected load cell load cells load cells load cells N y y 3 mV V 0 mV V O kg 1000 kg 2000 kg 3000 kg 4000 kg 020 k9 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 2 Fixed Tare Gross Weight and Net Weight 1 Fixed tare The fixed tare refers to the fixed permanent weight on the load cells not subjected to the measurement such as that of the stand or hopper to be necessary when a weighing machine is built using load cells In the case of the platform scale as in the figure below the table supported by load cells on which the items to be measured will be placed is referred to as fixed tare By completing the following tasks the system can be used as a weighing machine by implementing the fixed tare a Procedures 1 When performing two point zero calibration do not put anything on the fixed tare When the tare zero offset function is enabled the load cell output reading corresponding to the gross weight of the fixed tare on the load cells is automatically cancelled to prov
250. offset by the tare zero offset function is calculated as follows Tare zero offset x 8388607 __outputvalue gt 0 Maximum weighing capacity Two point span setting value kg calibration value 65935 Fixed tare weight kg Point O f Tare zero offset Un G54 is set to Not used 1 Tare zero offset output value Un G54 is always regarded as 0 When using the tare zero offset function do not use Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 The accuracy is not guaranteed When using Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 set Tare zero offset Un G54 to Not used 1 3 When setting is performed by the user Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to User setting 1 and perform the two point calibration The setting value 2 gt Page 52 Section 4 6 1 can be changed by Two point calibration request Y7 For the setting procedures refer to gt Page 61 Section 4 8 2 a Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 The optimum gain must be selected from the following three cases For details on Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 refer to K gt Page 143 Section 6 2 30 Optimum Instrumentation Corresponding A D amplifier gain setting Conversion range converter output Un G80 value Max 7FFFFF Load cell rated output Un G52 setting value Gain for converting the input of O to 1mV V Setting value 0 Gain for converting the input of O to 800000y to Op to
251. oint 16Point 16Point 16Point 16Point Continued to the next page 208 To check the operation click the button to cancel the start of control Click the OK button to suspend the Online Module Change mode Click the button to close the System Monitor window CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Continued Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device window Device Name A OO A E O Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Modify value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Ba tch Address Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Conversion enable 0 6 Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Modify Value Y9 Device Label Buffer Memory 7 Monitor the buffer memory address of Gross weight Device Label output value Un G100 Un G101 to check if the YA conversion is being normally performed Data Type Bit 8 Turn off Two point calibration mode switch request ON pit i switch ONJOFF YA to switch to the normal mode 9 Before the control is started check the following m Sethable Range points on the Q61LD If an error occurs refer to Troubleshooting gt Page 235 Section 11 2 to Execution Result lt lt take corrective actions e The RUN LED is on e The ERR LED is off e Error
252. oint Calibration Setting cael 2 Click the Two Point Calibration Setting 0000 Q61LD LaS il button Set two point calibration setting When you use the scale for the first time or scale installation site has been changed please specify the scale initial setting Without the Scale Initial Setting the following settings cannot work appropriately When scale installation site was changed from the site where the two point calibration was performed gravitational acceleration needs to be corrected Please set the installation site Installation Site Setting When correcting the two point calibration setting values please set the scale correction setting Scale Correction Setting Close y Continued to the next page CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION Continued l 3 Click the button 3 Execute two point span calibration Current Two Point Calibration Value Item Setting Yalue Two Point Span Calibration Yalue 65536 Place a standard weight of which weight mass is MELSOFT Series GX Works2 the same as the standard weight setting on the T Two point span calibration will be executed Please place the weight equivalent to the standard weight setting on the weighing machine and press Yes weighing machine and click the button The two point span calibration is completed MELSOFT Series GX Works EJ When two point span calibration is completed the J UN elite eee ete ae IS
253. on R5 232C C System Monitor Online Module Change Main Base Operation to Selected Module E Main Base Main Base I O Adr 0000 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0070 Slot CPU Se ee a a i QI72LP25 25 Module Information List Main Base Main Base Information List Base Module Base Model Name P B slots DASS atus Base ji e Point Barama T lodules lo QU72LP25 25 0 0 Q Q61LD 16Point Intelli 16Point Extension Base3 Empty Empty 16Point Extension Base4 x Empty Empty 16Point Extension BaseS x Empty Empty 16Point 0030 Extension Base x Empty Empty 16Point 0040 t t t Extension Basel Extension Base2 0000 0010 0020 Extension Base Empty Empty 16Point 0050 0060 0070 Empty Empty 16Poin Legend a _ Empty Empty 16Poin major Error A Moderate Error Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Module Changing Network No Master er yo M Type Point Address Station No PLC Online Module Change gt Operation y Target Module y Module change I O Address ooo Execution Installation Module Name RSILD Confirmation gt Status gt pokes Module Selection Completed Module Contral Restart estatus Guidance Please turn off Y signal of Ehe changed module when ou change the intelligent Function module Please press next button when you are ready Point Open the System Monito
254. on setting completion flag Q61LD X Y1000 to X Y100F X100C Input signal error detection X100E Conversion completion signal X100F Error flag Y1009 Operating condition setting request Y100F Error clear request D1000 to D1007 D1019 to D1022 D1024 to D1031 D1045 Devices storing data that are written with the Z P REMTO instruction D1100 to D1111 Initial setting value zero point adjustment request D1113 to D1115 D1145 D1190 MO Gross weight output conversion in processing M2 Outside the zero point range M3 Weighing capacity over M4 Input signal error detection M5 Gross weight upper limit M6 Gross weight lower limit M7 Conversion over M8 Stable status output M9 Center zero point output M100 Master module status check device for execution of the MC and MCR instructions M101 Initial setting auxiliary device M102 Initial setting auxiliary device M103 Initial setting start flag storage device M104 Initial setting completion flag storage device 174 M210 to M212 M220 to M222 M230 to M232 M260 to M262 M270 to M272 M280 to M282 M290 to M292 M300 to M302 M310 to M312 M320 to M322 M330 to M332 SB20 SB47 SB49 SW70 SW74 SW78 T100 to T104 W4 W34 W35 W36 Device CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING Function Completion devices and auxiliary devices of the Z P REMTO instruction Completion devices and auxiliary devices of the Z P REMFR instruction Network module status Master station baton pass status
255. onditions e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 100kg e Load cell rated output Un G52 2 0mV V e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 4 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 80kg e Fixed tare weight 200kg 10000 80kg UNAS 5000 AS PF At Mee 2 2 5mV 5mV 7 5mV 10mV UONOUN JSSHO OJ9Z SB Y p Digital output value Gross weight output value Fixed tare weight Okg Analog input value of the module 91 1 Setting method The setting may be either automatically performed at the time of two point zero calibration or manually performed by the user through manual calculation of the setting values Normally automatic setting is convenient e Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 Point O The following parameters are used to set A D converter gain setting Un G81 and Tare zero offset output value Un G82 UniG83 e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 e Load cell rated output Un G52 Number of load cells in connection Un G53 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 2 When using automatic setting If Two point calibration method setting Un G41 is set to Automatic setting 0 the following three parameters are set automatically upon two point zero calibration 2 gt Page 61 Section 4 8 2 If automatic setting has been made the parameters cannot be c
256. onfiguration Function When Another System is Available 1 Stopping the operation New Project Project Type Simple Project Use Label PLE Series PLE Type Q172LP25 Q1728R 15 Remotel O Language Ladder r y 1 Create a new project Project gt New Le e 2 Inthe PLC Type field select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O and click the button 20 CSU SUB I Rb E TA Ne 3 Open the Connection Destination window Connection Destination CP 3 ME Current Connection F Transfer Setup Connection1 198 a AEN J Serial CCIE Cont Li Ethernet CCIE Field Q Series USB NET 10 H Board Board Bus Board Navigation window gt Connection destination view gt Connection data name sa e I O station and click the Icom com 1 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps CC IE Field CC IE Field CC IE Field MAC 46 Q6TEL Master Local Communication Ethernet Module Head Module Adapter button Gt Module Computer Type l QI72LP25 BR15 5 No Specification Other Station Other Station Single Network Co existence Network Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 E CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H CCIECont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H Accessing Host Station ne Multiple CPU Setting TTT aor eens Continued to the next page Connection Channel List PLC Direct Coupled Setting Con
257. onnection No 1 is disconnected by the following program Device used Application Open completion signal Open request signal SP SOCCLOSE instruction control data SP SOCCLOSE instruction completion device Program Processing far dscormacton of SD12820 S012840 HA fee s L Comecton No tby ho target M2000 5012820 M210 ae E SP SOCOLOSE uo KI D200 Comecton Na 1 dose M161 SET eee wwo M a SET Normal competion e Eror camlation Resetting SPSOCCLOSE execu ng fag e Instructions can be executed under the following conditions l On the rising On the falling Any time edge edge e mn a u a e The following devices can be used Internal device Link direct Intelligent aay Setting system user File device JO O function i 3 3 register Constant Others data register module UDO GO Execution condition Symbol X Y M L P 1 J U A li pp ea e SM FB SB oo device 9 IR PASE BL S V 1 For details on each device refer to the following LI QnUCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals T An H QnPH QnPRHCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 2 FX and FY can be used for bit data only and FD for word data only 9 In the Constant and Others columns a device s that can be set for each instruction is shown e The following data types can be used Data type Description Bit Bit data or the start number of bit data BIN
258. or code M300 M301 SET M302 M301 a RST M302 X100F M302 Y a BCD _ D1190 K4Y30 Outputs of an error code in BCD BCD KO K4Y30 Error code output OFF Y100F Error clear request ON c Reading gross weight output value digital output value input signal error detection flag and warning output flag M104 X1000 X1009 Y1009 X10903 X100E AA TA A y TO gt MO Gross weight output conversion in processing ko gt Z REMFR J1 K2 K1 HO K100 D1100 K16 M310 M310 M311 SET M312 M311 FAL RST M312 X100C D1114 0 Reading of buffer memory addresses 100 to 115 bb HSH HHH JY M2 D1114 1 M3 D1114 2 ah D1114 3 WSs M7 X1008 D1115 0 bt HA HH aH _ _ _ CM D1115 1 6 Outside the zero point range An alarm is output even when Warning output setting is configured to be disabled Excess of weighing capacity An alarm is output even when Warning output setting is configured to be disabled Input signal error detection Excess of input values to be converted Gross weight upper limit Gross weight lower limit 185 YIOMION O I BJoOWSY JO HuluswesBOld 6 d Zero set reset M8 Safety status output p KO D1100 HM Center zero point detection MO SET D1045 0 Zero set request ON ZP REMTO ar K3 K1 HO K45 D1045 KI M260 M260 M261 SET M262 MO M262 a Z REMFR J1 K4 K1 HO K145 D1145 KI M320 M320 M321 SET M322 D1045 0 D1145 0 M322 __ RST D1045 0
259. ount Average and Moving Skshle etah iw Fima rakhinna 2 Set the value the number of times for Moving average setting Count average setting EN A Mowing average setting EF TIMES umm Item Setting value Moving average setting 2 to 255 Ex When Moving average setting is set to 4 times Conversion speed 10ms 3 4 2 6 10 11 7 9 12 Weight 1st storage a 2nd storage b 3rd storage c 0O 3 gt Time ms A Conversion completion signal XE OFF Conversion completion flag Un G113 Conversion stop 0 x Conversion completion 1 Gross weight output value eee Un G100 Un G101 a X b X e aaa a vi ig i Digital output value Sos Rue Seed Nee Un G102 Un G103 1st storage a 2nd storage b 3rd storage c 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 6 4 4 4 84 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 Combination use of count average and moving average The output values of the count average processing are moving average processed and stored into the buffer memory a Setting method 1 Set Averaging processing method setting to 5 Combination Use of Count Average and Moving Average DO Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Parameter Averaging processing l n method settina 5 Combination Use of Count Average and Moving Average Count average setting 0 5ampling Processing gt Moving avera
260. pan calibration Disable Two point zero calibration requested ON Two point zero calibration requested OFF Two point calibration setting Disable Two point calibration method setting Automatic setting Two point calibration setting Zero Calibration Disable Span calibration Enable Two point span calibration requested ON Two point span calibration requested OFF Two point calibration setting Disable Output an error code in BCD Error code output OFF Error clear request ON Number of load cells in connection Un G53 O l module change is presumed after completion of two point calibration it is recommended to save the following setting values to the CPU file register or latch area using the G P OGLOAD instruction APPENDICES 5 Program example user setting Perform user setting when any fine adjustment is necessary after the backup of the calibration data are reflected or after the automatic setting was performed once a Reading two point calibration values x7 Y7 x9 Y9 UN G43 0U0 G43 1 U0 G 148 0 l l EES i ES S Y E E A LO Simultaneous request interlock M40 X0 X13 EM SET M50 Two point calibration start flag X0A X14 t RST M50 M50 edi YOA Two point calibration mode switch request ON XOA gue n SET MO Operating condition setting command MO XOF M40 UN HH MOV HO GO Conversion enable SET Y9 Operating condition setting request ON RST MO Operati
261. performs the operation previous to the marked one 3 When another system is not available the following data must be recorded before changing a module and the recorded data must be set to the buffer memory after the change Save Restoration Setting List 7 Page 222 Section 10 9 270 APPENDICES Appendix 5 4 Procedures of online module change This section describes respective procedures for the cases when another system is available and when not available 1 System configuration The following system configuration is used to explain the procedure of online module change Q61LD X Y0 to X YF 2 Procedures The procedure of online module change is shown below Stop the operation Remove the module Mount a new module Check the operation Restart the control aBueyo sjnpowW suljuo jo sainpa901y yg xipueddy pasn si Jadojarnag X5 u yM eBueyo sinpoyy suuo G xipueddy 2 1 Appendix 5 5 When another system is available 1 Stopping the operation 1 Open the Device test window Device test al online gt Debug gt Device test 2 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Hide hist FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle torce _ Hide Fistor Conversion disable 1 3 Turn Operating condition setting request Y9 from Word device buffer memory Device 4 Buffer memory Module start 1 0 oona Hex i i confirm that conversion has stopped a
262. put signal error detection flag Un G114 will be operational these are error flags for the gross weight output value except for Input signal error detection function Un G114 b3 Ignore these signals when using Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 O Correction to Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 can be made by setting the following buffer memory areas For more details refer to the Setting Data Details lt gt Page 126 Section 6 2 e Digital output zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 e Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 74 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION a Setting method Use the Scale Initial Setting window for the setting 1 Select the module to be used and click the Module Selection Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting X Module Selection Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt o000 Q61LD Analog Module gt Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting Cancel 2 Click the button Two Point Calibration Setting 0000 061LD Set two point calibration setting When you use the scale for the first time or scale installation site has been changed please specify the scale initial setting ale Initial Selting 7 Without the Scale Initial Setting the following settings cannot work appropriately When scale installation site was changed from the site where the two point calibration was performed gravitational acceleration needs to be corrected Please set the
263. r window of the remote I O station O Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Select Online Module Change in Mode and double click the module to be changed online Click the button to make the module c replaceable If the following error window is displayed the target buffer memory data cannot be saved for backup For details on the target buffer memory refer to Save Restoration Setting List gt Page 222 Section 10 9 MELSOFT Application i The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation Click the button and perform the operation in gt Page 201 Section 10 5 3 After checking that the RUN LED of the module is off remove external connections and remove the module Always remove the module If installation confirmation is executed without actually removing the module the module will not start normally and the RUN LED will not turn on 200 3 Mounting a new module Online Module Change Operation Target Module Module Change WO Address 0000 Execution 61LO il Module Name E Confirmation Status Module Control Changing Module Restart Shatus ouidance The module can be exchanged Please press the next button after installing a new module Cancel CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Install the removed module and a new module to another separate system Use the G P OGLOAD instruction to save the setting da
264. r failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in e Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT e Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User e Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant r
265. rated output lt 2 0mV V 2 0mV V span calibration value Un G1620 Un G1621 2 0mV V lt Load cell rated output lt 3 0mV V 3 0mV V span calibration value Un G1624 Un G1625 81 peo jenjoe ue noy im pawojsad si UONeugijeo UBSUAA y 8 p UOOUN UOHEIQIED JUIOd OM BV 49 Weight Conversion Method 82 Weight conversion refers to the process to convert an analog signal load cell output signal from the outside of the programmable controller to Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 and Gross weight output value Un G100 UniG101 for storing into the buffer memory After the conversion is completed Conversion completion signal XE turns on and Conversion completion flag Un G113 is set to Conversion completion 1 The following four processing methods are available for weight conversion e Sampling processing e Count average e Moving average e Combination use of count average and moving average 1 Sampling processing After the measurement the resulting Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 and Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 are stored into the buffer memory The update cycle of measured values Sampling cycle is 10ms a Setting method Set Averaging processing method setting to 0 Sampling Processing YD Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Parameter Areraging processing wer method setting 5 Combination Use of Count Average and Moving Average
266. ration value L calibration value A 6591 y 1 0mV V 1 0mV Y span calibration value H calibration value 1 0mV Y span calibration value H 6524 2 0mV V zero calibration value 2 0mV V zero calibration value L 6593 y SS 2 0mV V zero calibration value ania ae i 6544 p O o a OmV V 2 0mV V span calibration value L calibration value 2 0mV V span calibration value L 6554 2 0mV V 2 0mV V span calibration value H calibration value 2 0mV V span calibration value H 6596 y Por 3 0mV V zero calibration value 3 0mV V zero calibration value L 6574 e a e OmV V zero calibration value 3 0mV V zero calibration value H 658 y a a LM OmV V 3 0mV V span calibration value L calibration value 3 0mV V span calibration value L 6594 3 0mV V 3 0mV V span calibration value H calibration value 3 0mV V span calibration value H 65Ay a System area 6FDy a si7 Aowa yng 19 121 Default setting Read Write 2 registration Address Data Description Hex H type GFEy 1790 Latest error code error code command E N two Last two 6FFy 1791 digits of digits of the year the year Error 700y 1 INS Month Day TO LN A 7014 a 7024 1794 Day of Second the week 7034 1795 7074 1799 7084 Al History 1 Error code latest First two Last two 709y 1801 digits of digits of the year the year Error 70Ay 1802 Month
267. ro tracking range setting Un G6 zero point correction will not be performed As the zero point after zero point correction exceeds the range set by Zero point range setting Un G22 zero point correction will not be performed If it is found that zero tracking is not working perform the zero reset operation and check if Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 is inside the zero point range If necessary perform proper corrective actions such as to remove any accretion on the weighing machine CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION When the total amount of correction by the zero point adjustment function exceeds the range set by Zero point range setting Un G22 with reference to the ZERO point set in the two point calibration the following status will result e The zero tracking function will stop functioning until it returns to within the range set by Zero point range setting Un G22 e When zero set is performed Input signal error detection flag Un G114 bO will result in Outside the zero point range 1 2 gt Page 92 Section 4 12 3 If Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 does not return to O when no measuring object is on the scale with zero tracking function being used this may be the case Take measures such as removing any accretion from the weighing machine or performing two point zero calibration to reset the zero point uolnoun4 Bulyoes 0197 0l p 8 1 Zero tracking range setting and zero tracking time sett
268. rogrammable controller CPU QO2PHCPU A Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Redundant CPU Up to 53 Q25PRHCPU Process CPU Up to 64 18 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Applicable CPU module Number of Applicable base unit mountable Extension base 4 Main base unit modules unit QO0UJCPU QOOUCPU QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU QO3UDECPU QO4UDEHCPU eee QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU a es CPU type CPU model Universal model Programmable QCPU controller CPU bot a V HO1 QO6CCPU V QO6CCPU V B Q12DCCPU V C Controller module Up to 64 O Applicable x N A 4 Limited to the number of I O points on the CPU module 2 Mountable to any I O slot of the applicable base unit 3 No extension base unit can be connected to a safety CPU module To use the Q61LD with a C Controller module refer to the user s manual for the C Controller module suwa s s ajgeoiddy 1 z 19 b When mounted in a MELSECNET H remote I O station The following table shows the network modules applicable to the Q61LD the number of mountable modules and applicable base units Depending on the combination with other mounted modules and the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may become insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules If the power supply capacity is insufficient review
269. rrection value Un G70 UniG71 is 400 per 900 calculation is performed as follows 400 9800 0 0416666 Accordingly Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 is 4 1666 Because any number cannot be set after the fourth decimal place the value is rounded off to four decimal places and 4167 is set In addition by performing 4 167 span correction the output value 200 before correction becomes as follows 200 x 104 167 208 Accordingly Digital output span correction value Un G70 Un G71 becomes 208 Point If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions and the information on errors that occur refer to the following e Minimum division Un G58 3 Page 138 Section 6 2 23 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 30 Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e This setting is used to set gain for amplifying the input from the load cell Input is amplified in combination with A D converter gain setting Un G81 An optimal value is determined by Load cell rated output Un G52 and can be set by either Automatic setting 0 or User setting 1 of Two point calibration method setting Un G41 Note that if Two point calibration method setting Un G41 is set to User setting 1 the conditions for setting values are complicated Usually it is more convenient to set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to Automatic setting 0 Under the following condition
270. rrent Setting Walue of Q61LD 2 Execute two point zero calibration Current Two Point Calibration Value Item Setting Value 2 0m lt Load cell rated Instrumentation Amplifier Gain Setting output lt 3 0mY Y _ AID Converter Gain Setting x1 Zero Offset Output Value 1646 Two Point Zero Calibration Value 65536 MELSOFT Series GX Works 1 Two point zero calibration will be executed Please make sure that there is nothing on the weighing machine and press Yes Tes MELSOFT Series GX Works i AZ 3 Execute two point span calibration Current Two Point Calibration Value Setting Value Item Two Point Span Calibration Value 65536 Continued to the next page 78 4 Perform two point zero calibration 5 With nothing placed on the weighing machine 0kg except for the fixed tare click the button 6 Click the button 7 The two point zero calibration will be completed 8 Perform two point span calibration 9 Enter the calculated value to Two Point Span Calibration Value Refer to Calculating the two point span calibration value 2 gt Page 81 Section 4 8 4 4 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION Continued y 10 Click the Scale Initial Setting 0000 Q61LD 1 Set a condition to execute two point zero span calibration Current Setting Value of Q61LD Load cell Item Setting Yalue Rated Capacity
271. rror nonan aaaea 91 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 148 Input signal error detection function 91 Input signal error detection setting Un G21 131 Input signal error detection signal XC 116 Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 ANG OO races Gy aaa ce aie des Gea Bk hee 140 Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 143 Latest error code Un G190 Un G1790 151 Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 135 Load cell rated output Un G52 136 Maximum and minimum values hold function 106 Maximum and minimum values reset completion flag Dato a PO a a 116 Maximum and minimum values reset request YD E ne ee E eee 116 Maximum digital output value Un G108 Un G109 O A O 147 Maximum gross weight output value Un G104 TING 105 A A eG area et 147 Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 DA E e ee Gow a bee de 137 Minimum digital output value Un G110 Un G111 A nace ts 147 Minimum division Un G58 138 Minimum gross weight output value Un G106 Un G107 O wate ale enh ees 147 Module ready XO 00 000 ee eee eee 110 Moving average processing 84 Moving average setting Un G3 127 Number of load cells in connection Un G53 136 O W Online Module Change o oo oo 192 Warning output flag Un G115 149 Online module change wh
272. s Opens the discharge valve and puts the measured material into the mixer Operates the knocker and vibrator to discharge the material smoothly Waits until the gross weight output value is stable below the near zero setting value and ends as discharge completion 1 System configuration For the system configuration refer to the following e Programming in Normal System Configuration gt Page 165 Section 9 2 1 2 Programming conditions For the programming conditions refer to the following e Programming in Normal System Configuration lt gt Page 166 Section 9 2 2 3 Device list X10 X11 X12 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D10 D11 D12 D13 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M10 M15 M16 M17 M20 M21 M22 M24 M25 M30 TO T1 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING Function Measurement start Discharge start QX10 X10 to X1F Error check Measurement start weight value Net weight value Gross weight output value Setting before quantity determination Head correction setting Overweight setting Underweight setting Measurement setting Measurement completion value Supply completion Small quantity supply Overweight judgment Underweight judgment Overweight underweight judgment value Gross weight output conversion in processing Near zero point Outside the zero point range Weighing capacity over Input signal error
273. s the most proper value is automatically set according to Load cell rated output UniG52 Two point calibration method setting Un G41 is set to Automatic setting 0 and Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 is set to Two point zero calibration requested 1 Load cell rated output Setting value 0 3mV Y lt rated output lt 1 0mV V On 1 0mV V lt rated output lt 2 0mV V 1H 2 0mV V lt rated output lt 3 0mV V 2H Point O If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions and the information on errors that occur refer to the following e Minimum division Un G58 3 Page 138 Section 6 2 23 O When Two point calibration method setting Un G41 is set to Automatic setting 0 any value directly set in Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 is ignored sjiejoq ejeq Bumes 79 143 31 A D converter gain setting Un G81 e This setting is used to set gain for amplifying the input from the load cell Input is amplified in combination with Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e This setting is enabled when Tare zero offset Un G54 is set to Used 0 e A D converter gain can be set by setting Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to either Automatic setting 0 or User setting 1 e An optimal value is determined by three values set in Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un 51 Number of load cells in connection Un G53 and Maximum
274. s for programming Qn H QnPH QnPRHCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals lt SH 080808ENG 13JZ28 gt 2 Programming manual Manual name Description lt manual number model code gt MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction Detailed description and usage of instructions used in programs lt SH 080809ENG 13JW10 gt 3 Operating manual Manual name Description lt manual number model code gt GX Works2 Version 1 Operating Manual Common System configuration parameter settings and online operations common lt SH 080779ENG 13JU63 gt to Simple project and Structured project of GX Works2 GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual Operating methods of GX Developer such as programming printing lt SH 080373E 13JU41 gt monitoring and debugging CONTENTS S ARE ae od med 7 21 ON OLN OS eee E Ag Oo o rer emery age On an a AEE ee ee 1 CONDIMONS OF USE ROR Mile PRODUCT e he ame ee eee occur eo 5 INTRODUCTION O E ES AE AR oer 6 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 0 0 cece eee 6 RELEVANTE MANU ES E A en a eds ae een a eee ye R 7 WMANUAMPASEORGANIZATON E ll a E EN EEE T wane 11 TERM E E ev OS 14 PAG IN CST o AEEA EU ECN POS ao 14 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 15 TaN A A A ne Meh Bt a eae 15 t Control System to Use the QILD criadas mised metas Ad seeks 17 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 18 21 Applicable Systems soccer aid soil du thse 18 2 2 When Using the
275. s off turn off Two point setting request Y7 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Continued 4 11 Before the control is started check the following points on the Q61LD If an error occurs refer to Troubleshooting 7 Page 235 Section 11 2 to take corrective actions e The RUN LED is on e The ERR LED is off e Error flag XF is off 12 Since the new module is in default initial setting must be configured through a sequence program after starting control Before configuring the initial setting check the following point to see if the content of the initial setting program is correct e Add an user device to perform the initial setting Initial setting request signal in the sequence program at any timing After the control restarted turn on Initial setting request signal to perform the initial setting The settings will not be configured if the sequence program is specified to configure the settings only to one scan after the data link of the remote I O network is established 5 Restarting control 1 Open the Online Module Change window again Online Module Change Operation Target Module Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Module Change 1 0 Address 0000 Execution 2 Click the O61LD Installation Module Name f4 Confirmation Module ready X0 turns on VA Module Control Change Module Installation Completion Restart il button to restart control Status tsuidance The controls
276. s weight output value H output value F 6A Minimum Minimum gross weight output value L Minimum gross weight output value L output value L 6B o Minimum Minimum gross weight output value H Minimum gross weight output value H output value H 6Cy Maximum Maximum digital output value L output value 6D a Maximum digital output value H output value H 6Ey Minimum a output value L 6F a Minimum digital output value H output value H 70y e area 00 00 L L I I I E I T I I 71H a ac Conversion completion flag 72H ci signal error detection flag 0000 73H e Warning output flag output flag 120 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY Default Address Data E a setting Description Read Write i Hex H type registration command Ay T System area SE 8F y e Two point calibration completion flag 00004 f O x 2 a a E 914 Md Zero point Zero point adjustment completion flag completion flag 0000 x System area 93H 944 gt Default setting registration command r H 95H 149 M Default value writing completion flag 150 96 BD INES BEy Latest error code Firsttwo Last two BFy digits of digits of the year the year CO MES Error occurrence time oe of C24 194 Second N week C34 64D 1613 64F y 1 0mV V zero calibration value 1 0mV V zero calibration value H 6504 a 1 0mV V 1 0mV V span calib
277. save restoration must be performed with another system which is the one mounted in the main base unit Another system mounted in a remote I O station cannot perform the save restoration operation 193 aBueuyd anpojy auluo 104 SUONNeaald 1 0L 10 2 Conditions of Online Module Change For online module change the following MELSECNET H remote I O module Q61LD GX Works2 and base unit are required Online module change is available on the Q61LD from the first product 06000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000009090 1 MELSECNET H remote I O module Use the module of function version D or later 2 GX Works2 Use GX Works2 Version 1 34L or later 3 Base unit e When the slim type main base unit Q3 O SB is used online module change cannot be performed e When an extension base unit that requires no power supply module Q5 O B is used all modules mounted on the base unit cannot be changed online 194 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 3 Operation during Online Module Change This section describes the operation during online module change User operation 1 Stop the operation Turn off all the Y signals turned on by the sequence program 2 Remove the module Start the online module change O Executed x Not executed Operation of the CPU module Operation of the Q61LD X Y refresh FROM TO Dedicated Device instructions 1 instruction test
278. se the scale for the first time or scale installation site has been changed please specify the scale initial setting Without the Scale Initial Setting the following settings cannot work appropriately When scale installation site was changed from the site where the two point calibration was performed gravitational acceleration needs to be corrected Please set the installation site Installation Site Setting When correcting the two point calibration setting values please set the scale correction setting Scale Correction Setting Close uonouny uoneJqiep JUIOd OM gy 3 Set the conditions to be used for two point Scale Initial Setting 0000 061LD calibration 1 Set a condition to execute two point zero span calibration Current Setting Value of Q61LD aci L gt Page 80 Section 4 8 4 3 Item Setting Value Rated Capacity 10000 Rated Output 0 Smv v Number of load cells in connection 1 Scale Setting For the setting values refer to Setting details peo enjoe ue moy im pauojled s uonesqijeo uUayM y 8 p Item Zero Offset Not Used Maximum Weighing Capacity Setting 10000 Minimum Division 1 Decimal Point Position 0 Unit kg Installation site Standard Weight Setting Continued to the next page Continued y Before executing the following processes be sure to check the Cu
279. sion enable disable setting Un GO Whether to enable or disable gross weight output and digital output is set b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO otololololololololololojo jejeJjo AA E E Data for b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Conversion enable 1 Conversion disable a Enabling the settings Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the settings b Default Conversion disable 1 is set by default 2 Averaging processing method setting Un G1 A method for averaging processing is set Set the following to the buffer memory Description Setting value Sampling processing OH Count average 2H Moving average 3H Averaging processing Combination use of count average and 5 H moving average a Enabling the settings Turn on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the settings b Default Combination use of count average and moving average 5 is set by default Point O lfa value outside the setting range is written an error occurs and the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code UniG 190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence O When Count average 24 Moving average 3p or Combination use of count average and moving average 54 has been selected for the average processing method setting set the count to Count average setting Un G2 and Moving
280. t Debug gt Device test Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Conversion disable 1 Turn Operating condition setting request Y9 from off to on Check Conversion completion flag Un G113 to confirm that conversion has stopped and turn off Operating condition setting request Y9 If the content of the buffer memory has not been recorded beforehand record the content by referring to the following procedures 6 to 9 Set Two point setting Un G40 to Read 0 Turn Two point setting request Y7 from off to on After checking that Two point setting completion flag X7 is off turn off Two point setting request Y7 Record the content of the save restoration settings Save Restoration Setting List gt Page 222 Section 10 9 Before restarting the module control perform two point calibration device test on GX Developer according to the flowchart for two point calibration shown in Setting and procedure Page 252 Appendix 4 1 Restarting the module control without two point calibration will operate the module in default 278 APPENDICES 2 Removing the module 1 Open the System Monitor window System Monitor Installed status Base me 0 1 2 3 4 5 Je Meres O gt gt Uno Unmo Unmo Unmo Unmo Unmo Unmo unti funti funti funti Junti funti funti ng ng ng ng ng ng ng Parameter status Mode _ ee ee eT System monitor Ea ss o i a2 3a a 5 e 7 Online
281. t Y9 m Settable Range Execution Result lt lt Execution Result Data Type Bik Bit Bit Reflect to Input Column Delete a qe 1eny si ua s s JoujouY u yM WesboJY ssuanbas e Aq Je s1aJalueJeg U YUM 90L 205 2 Removing the module System Monitor Monitor Status Connection Channel List System Image Stop Monitor Serial Port NET 10 H Remote Module Connection R5 232C C System Monitor Online Module Change Main Base Operation to Selected Module i Main Base Main Base VO Adr 00 Slot CPU Q QJ72LP25 25 E isimin nesies ES Module Information List Main Base Main Base Information List Base Module Base Model Name ki E o errs atus Base ji e Point i T lodules lol Point Address Station Po Power Wi Extension Basel CA cr S Extension Base2 0 0 Q Q61LD 16Point Intelli 16Point 0000 Extension Base3 a Empty Empty 16Point Extension Base4 Empty Empty 16Poir Extension BaseS Empty Empty 16Poin Extension Base6 Empty Empty 16Poin Extension Base Empty Empty 16Poinl Empty Empty 16Poinl Empty Empty 16Poinl lo PLC 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0070 t t t t t t t t A Moderate Error Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Module Changing Major Error I O Network No Master ion Ni Online Module Change Operatian 7 vA Module Change Execution I
282. t and press the module until it snaps into suonnesalg Buljpuey 17 place Incorrect mounting can cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw e Before handling the module discharge the static electricity from your body by touching an object such as grounded metal Failure to discharge static electricity can cause a failure or malfunction of the module 153 1 2 Procedure Before Operation The procedure of system operation is shown below Module mounting Mount the Q61LD to the base unit Connect the load cell and the Q61LD 1 I gt Page 156 Section 7 4 Two point calibration setting Since the Q61LD is used as a measure module set the Q61LD that meets the specifications and peripheral devices of the load cell L gt Page 60 Section 4 8 Two point calibration Set a proper two point zero calibration value and two point span calibration value with the two point setting values L gt Page 60 Section 4 8 Programming debugging Create a sequence program for measuring an object and confirm the sequence program ES Page 163 CHAPTER 9 4 If Conversion enable disable setting Un GO is set to Conversion enable 0 before completing the wiring it can cause an error The wiring must be made in the 6 wire or 4 wire type If multiple load cells are to be connected in parallel be sure to use
283. t to place on load cell at time of two point span calibration 1 to 99999 4 Click the MELSOFT Series GX Works Condition change will be written to the module Do you wank Eo continue 5 The setting is complete MELSOFT Series GX Works ES 7 Condition reflection completed poyjau Bulnes z 8 p uonouny uoneqijen juIod om gp Rated Capacity Set the load cell rated capacity 1 to 999999 Rated Output Set the load cell rated output in 0 1mV V increments 0 3to 3 0 Load cell Number of load cells Set the number of load cells connected in parallel 1 to 4 in connection e Used Zero Offset Set the tare zero offset function to Used or Not used e Not used Maximum Weighing o Set the rated capacity as a weighing machine 1 to 99999 Capacity Setting Scale Setting 1 2 a Set the minimum division of Gross weight output value Un G100 5 Minimum Division Un G101 10 e 20 e 50 65 0 ex 0 1 Decimal Point ad e x 0 01 Position Un G101 e x 0 001 e x 0 0001 g Set the unit of Gross weight output value Un G100 UniG101 e kg et Standard Weight Set the weight value mass of the standard weight to be placed on the e Setting scale upon two point span calibration Installation Site Installation Site Gravitational Set the decimal point position of Gross weight output value Un G100 Scale Setting Unit Set the gravitational acceleration at the installation site
284. t value is read with the Q61LD Set the instruction to enable the conversion Perform averaging processing mn Set an averaging processing method NO Use the stable status function Set the stable status range and stable status time Use the zero tracking function dle Set the zero tracking range and zero tracking time Set automatic return when excess of analog input values is corrected NO YES Configure the setting to Conversion over operation stop automatic return Use the warning output function NO Set the instruction to enable the warning output and a gross weight lower lower limit value lower upper limit value upper lower limit value and upper upper limit value YES Use the input signal error NO detection function Set the instruction to enable the input signal error detection and an input signal error detection values Set a zero balance amendment 2 Turn on and then off Operating condition setting request Y9 Read the gross weight output value or digital output value End 4 If gross weight output values are not stable after two point zero calibration or two point span calibration perform averaging processing before two point calibration 2 Always set the range CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 9 2 Programming in Normal System Configuration Program examples are shown in the following system configuration 1 Syst
285. ta is outside the setting range Condition Conversion enable disable setting Un GO is set to Conversion disable 1 Warning output setting Un G20 b0 is set to Warning output disabled 1 Warning output setting Un G20 b8 is set to Input signal error detection disable 1 Averaging processing method setting Un G1 is set to Sampling processing 0 Averaging processing method setting Un G1 is set to Count average 2p Averaging processing method setting Un G1 is set to Moving average 3 Tare zero offset Un G54 is set to Not used 1 5 Conditions where no error occurs even if the set data is outside the setting Setting data where no error occurs even if the set data is outside the setting range All the setting data Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit value setting H Un G31 Input signal error detection setting Un G21 Count average setting Un G2 Moving average setting Un G3 Moving average setting Un G3 Count average setting Un G2 Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 Conditions where the set data is not activated even if the setting was changed The table below lists the conditions and setting data where the set data is not activated even if the setting was changed Setting data not activated regardless Condition of the setting change Moderate error status Conversion ena
286. ta to the CPU device For details on the G P OGLOAD instruction refer to gt Page 242 Appendix 1 1 Use the G P OGSTOR instruction to restore the data set by the user For details on the G P OGSTOR instruction refer to gt Page 246 Appendix 1 2 Remove the new module from the separate system and insert it into the same slot where the original module was mounted Then mount the terminal block Mount the new module to the same slot and connect external wires After the module is secured in place click the button and check that the RUN LED turns on Module ready X0 remains off 201 a qe 1eny si ua s s JouJOoUY u yM UONOUNY uonelnbiuoo y Ag jas due siajaweleg uaym GOL 4 Checking the operation Online Module Change MELSOFT Application i System Monitor Oe o oo oe fran YO Adr 0000 0010 0020 0030 0040 0050 0060 0070 16Point 16Point 16Point 16Point 16Point 16Point 16Point y Error E Major Error A Moderate Error Minor Error O Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Module Changing Continued to the next page 202 1 To check the operation click the button to cancel the start of control Click the Click the Monitor window button to suspend the Online Module Change mode button to close the System CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Con
287. tal output value Un G102 Un G103 will be 10000 for the input of 2 0mV V In either case the accuracy is 0 01 for 2 0mV V Load cell rated capacity 300kg x 4 K Fixed tare Aer RONI Conversion range upper limit wee 2 309mV V Load cell rated output AS Load cell output mV V Dn ae 08 12 1 6 2 0 2 309 A D conversion value 900204 7FEFFFH gt Digital output value 0 5000 7500 40009 Accuracy 0 01 towards 0 0 to 2 0 mV V 10000 at the load cell rated output a Gross weight output value x 107 kg 6000 0 3000 par Accuracy 0 01 towards 0 0 to 2 0 mV V of load Do not load anymore 2 4 Even if Load cell rated output Un G52 is changed from 1 2mV V to 2 0mV V as it is still within the range of 1 1mV V to 2 0mV the instrumentation amplifier gain of 0 to 2 0mV V will be applied 2 While the Q61LD itself can operate up to the input level of about 2 309mV V the load cell may be damaged because the level of 2 0mV V exceeds the corresponding load cell specification limit CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION b Modified case 2 When Load cell rated output Un G52 shown in the example conditions is changed from 1 2mV V to 2 4mV V e Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 Although the ZERO point and SPAN point will change the output value of 0 to 3000 maximum weighing capacity for the load cell load of 600 0kg to 900 0kg is unchanged e Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 In the previous example
288. ted load cell Multiple load cells connected in parallel can be regarded as a single load cell of which rated capacity is n times the capacity of each cell where n is the number of identical load cells connected in parallel e Parallel connection of load cells lt gt Page 158 Section 7 4 3 2 Leave the set values in the following buffer memory areas unchanged e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 e Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 Minimum division Un G58 e Decimal point position Un G59 e Unit Un G60 e Standard weight setting Un G62 Un G63 e Installation site gravitational acceleration Un G64 Un G65 e Calibration site gravitational acceleration Un G66 Un G67 APPENDICES Point O After setting Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 to Two point zero calibration requested 1 place nothing Okg on the weighing machine until Two point calibration completion flag Un1G 143 bO turns to Two point zero calibration completion 1 It may take a few seconds to complete two point zero calibration O The following functions can be used for Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 e Conversion enable disable setting Un GO e Averaging processing method setting Un G1 e Count average setting Un G2 e Moving average setting Un G3 e Digital output zero correction value Un G68 Un G69 e Digital output span correction value Un
289. the remote I O network is established APPENDICES 5 Restarting control 1 Open the Online module change window again Online module change ARE E 2 Click the button to restart control 1 0 address Module ready X0 turns on Module change execution ae Module name Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Change module installation completion Status Guidance The controls such as O FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting and wiring etc and execute cos 3 This completes the online module change MELSOFT series GX Developer X procedures Laj iL Online module change completed 3 qe 1ene s Wass Jayjoue u yM S S xipuaddy pasn si Jadojarnag XH u yM eBueyo sinpoyy suuo G xipueddy 211 Appendix 5 6 When another system is not available 1 Stopping the operation Device test m Bit device Device Close EE Hide history FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force m Word device butter memar C Buffer memory Module start I C Wid A IH sa d E HI Tel Er jo aT LI EX gt nEr f Device Setting value i DEC 1E bit integer v Set m Program Label reference program m Execution history Force OFF Force ON Module start 0 Address 0H 1 Point Open the Device test window online g
290. the CPU module or power off and on the programmable controller W Online gt Write to PLC lt or Power off on 6 Setting on remote I O station side 1 Create a QX Works2 project Select QCPU Q mode from PLC Series and select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remote I O from PLC Type Project gt New Project New Project Project Type simple Project Use Label PLE Series ocru 0 mode PLE Type Language Ladder r 2 Add Q61LD to the GX Works2 project DO Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Right click gt New Module New Module Module Selection Module Type Analog Module Module Mame Mount Position Base No Mounted Slot No 0 Acknowledge I O Assignment e Specify start Y address 0000 fH 1 Slot Occupy 16 points Title Setting Title cencel_ 178 3 Open the Q61LD initial setting window and set the following When creating a program without using intelligent function module parameters skip this step Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module Name gt Parameter EY 0000 061LD Parameter Display Filter Display All Item CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING ME i Basic setting Conversion enable disable setting _ Averaging processing method setting Count average setting Moving average setting Stable status range setting Stable status time setting Zero tracking rang
291. the combination of the modules Applicable base unit 2 Applicable network Number of mountable 4 Main base unit in the Extension base unit in module modules remote l O station the remote l O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G Up to 64 O QJ72BR15 O Applicable x N A 4 Limited to the number of I O points on the network module 2 Mountable to any I O slot of the applicable base unit The basic model QCPU and C Controller modules cannot be used in a MELSECNET H remote I O network 2 Application to a multiple CPU system When using the Q61LD in a multiple CPU system refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System a Compatible Q61LD The Q61LD is of the function version C from the first product and applicable to a multiple CPU system b Intelligent function module parameters Write intelligent function module parameters only to the control CPU of the Q61LD 3 Online module change The Q61LD is of the function version C from the first product and applicable to online module change For more details refer to the following e ONLINE MODULE CHANGE gt Page 192 CHAPTER 10 Page 268 Appendix 5 20 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 4 Compatible software packages The following table shows the systems and corresponding compatible software versions to be used with the Q61LD When using the Q61LD GX Works2 or GX Developer is required Software version Item GX Works2 GX Developer S
292. the normal mode APPENDICES Continued 4 16 Before starting control check the following items of the Q61LD If an error occurs refer to Troubleshooting lt gt Page 235 Section 11 2 to take corrective actions e The RUN LED is on e The ERR LED is off e Error flag XF is off 17 Since the new module is in default initial setting must be configured through a sequence program after starting control Before configuring the initial setting check the following point to see if the content of the initial setting program is correct e For the standard system configuration Use a sequence program that configures the initial setting at the rising edge of Module ready X0 When the module control is restarted Module ready X0 turns on and the initial setting is configured The settings will not be configured if the program is specified to configure the settings only to one scan after a RUN e When the module is used in a remote I O network Add an user device to perform the initial setting Initial setting request signal in the sequence program at any timing After the control restarted turn on Initial setting request signal to perform the initial setting The settings will not be configured if the sequence program is specified to configure the settings only to one scan after the data link of the remote I O network is established 3 qe lene ou s wua s s Jayjoue u yM 9 G xipuaddy pasn si Jadojarnag XH u yM
293. ther Station Other Station Single Network Co existence Network Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 mM CC IE Cont CC IE Field Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H CC IE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet CC Link NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Multiple CPU Setting BENN Doo o o y Continued to the next page 210 NET 10 H Remote FE Connection Channel List PLC Direct Coupled Setting Connection Test PLC Type Remotel O Detail System Image Phone Line Connection C24 Cancel 1 Create a new project Project 2 gt New In the PLC Type field select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O and click the button Open the Connection Destination window Navigation window gt Connection destination view gt Connection data name Set it to enable access to the modules of the remote I O station and click the button CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Continued Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor EP Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device WI n d OW C Device Name Buffer Memory Module Start 0000 w HEX Address o0 v DEC TZ Online o gt Monitor o gt Device Buffer Memory Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Batch E A A 6 oo otoj otojotojatojo oto orot oko o Enter the buffer memory address of Conversion 2 0 0 0000000000BBOBBO 10 y enab
294. ting range Capacity setting A D converter gain setting x Rated output mV V x Un G56 Un G57 Un G81 7 Rated capacities Connection numbers Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G50 Un G51 Un G53 Un G80 2 4 For A D converter gain setting Un G81 assign 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 times 2 For Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 assign 04 1 0mV V 14 2 0mV V or 24 3 0mV V O ifthe value that has been set fails to satisfy the conditions the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence O f an error occurs the setting becomes invalid and the value that has been in the buffer memory is reset to the original value before the setting request was issued 20 Number of load cells in connection Un G53 This setting is used to set the number of load cells in parallel connection The setting range is 1 to 4 load cells a Default The default value is 1 load cell Point If the setting fails to satisfy the conditions an error occurs For details on the conditions and the information on errors that occur refer to the following e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 2 Page 135 Section 6 2 18 136 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 21 Tare zero offset Un G54 This setting is used to specify whether or not the tare zero offset function is used Fixed
295. tinued Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor EP Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device WI n d OW Device Name ge A Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Modify value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format a Batch Monitor Address olololo olo o elololo c ol ol oko F 010 00 000000 00000000 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 off of 5 5 Monitor the buffer memory address of Conversion 2 0000 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 5 085 0 10 enable disable setting Un G0 to check if it is set to Conversion enable 0 6 Monitor the buffer memory address of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 to check if the conversion is being normally performed 7 Before the control is started check the following status of the Q61LD If an error occurs refer to Troubleshooting gt Page 235 Section 11 2 to take corrective actions e The RUN LED is on e The ERR LED is off e Error flag XF is off 5 Restarting control 1 Open the Online Module Change window again Online Module Change are Baai Medie DO Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Module Change O Address 0000 Execution 2 Click the i button to restart control Installation Module Name QO61LD Confirmation on Module ready X0 turns on m atau Y Module Control Change Module Installation Completion Restart StatusiGuidance The controls such as po FROMITO instruction
296. tion before system operation Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact Check the rated voltage and terminal layout before wiring to the module and connect the cables correctly Connecting a power supply with a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure Connecting a module to a terminal with a different voltage may cause malfunction of the module and failure of the connected devices Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may apply an excessive voltage to the load cell resulting in heat generation or damage of the load cell Startup and Maintenance Precautions NWARNING O Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock O Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock Undertightening the terminal screws can cause short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Startup and Maintenance Precautions CAUTION O Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire
297. tion is completed S 1 Completion status P System 0 Normal completion Except 0 Abnormal completion 2 System area 3 S 4 Load cell rated capacity L S 5 Load cell rated capacity H S 6 Load cell rated output S 7 Number of load cells in connection S 8 Tare zero offset function S 9 System area S 10 Maximum weighing capacity setting L s 11 Maximum weighing capacity setting H S 12 Minimum division S 13 Decimal point position S 14 Unit S 15 System area S 16 Standard weight setting L S 17 Standard weight setting H S 18 Installation site gravitational acceleration L 19 Installation site gravitational acceleration System H S 20 Calibration site gravitational acceleration L 6 21 Calibration site gravitational acceleration H S 22 Digital output zero correction value L S 23 Digital output zero correction value H S 24 Digital output span correction value L S 25 Digital output span correction value H S 26 System area S 33 S 34 Instrumentation amplifier gain setting S 35 A D converter gain setting S 36 Tare zero offset output value L S 37 Tare zero offset output value H S 38 Two point zero calibration value L 247 YO1S9O d 9 Z XIpu ddy suo1 on4 su pazeoip q xipuaddy Device Setting data Setting range Set by S 39 cre Two point zero calibration value H zero calibration value H S 40 Two Two point span calibrat
298. to Two point span calibration completion 1 e When Two point calibration request Un G43 bO is returned to Two point zero calibration not requested 0 and Two point calibration request Un G43 b1 is returned to Two point span calibration requested 0 Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 returns to Off 0 e When a two point zero calibration or two point span calibration is completed abnormally Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 b8 also turns to Two point calibration failed 1 149 sjlejoq ejeq Bumes 79 43 Zero point adjustment completion flag Un G145 The status of zero set or zero reset can be checked b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Data for b2 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Off 1 Zero set completion 0 Off 1 Zero reset completion e When zero set is completed Zero point adjustment completion flag Un G145 bO turns to zero set completion 1 When zero reset is completed Zero point adjustment completion flag Un G145 b1 turns to zero reset completion 1 e When Zero point adjustment request Un G45 is set back to Zero set not requested 0 or Zero reset not requested 0 Zero point adjustment completion flag Un G145 b0 or Zero point adjustment completion flag Un G145 b1 is also set back to Off 0 44 Default setting registration command Un G148 This command resets the values set in the buffer memory to the default values b15 b14 b13 b12 b11
299. to Save Restoration Setting List gt Page 222 Section 10 9 MELSOFT series GA Developer The tareet module didn t respond The task iz advanced to the Installation confirmation gjqejiene s Wass Jayjoue u yM S S xipuaddy pasn si Jadojarnag XH u yM ebueyo sinpoyy suuo G xipueddy 5 Click the operation in gt Page 274 Appendix 5 5 3 6 After checking that the RUN LED of the module is off remove external connections and remove the module Point Always remove the module If installation confirmation is executed without actually removing the module the module will not start normally and the RUN LED will not turn on 2 3 274 3 Mounting a new module 1 2 3 4 Online module change Operation Target module 5 IO address ODOH Module change execution Module name ELO Installation confirmation Status Module control restart l Changing module Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the Execute button after installing a new module Cancel Mount the removed module and a new module to another separate system Use the G P OGLOAD instruction to save the following setting data to the CPU device For details on the G P OGLOAD instruction refer to gt Page 242 Appendix 1 1 Use the G P OGSTOR instruction to restore the data set by the user For details on the G P OGSTOR instruction refer to gt Page 246 Appendix 1 2 Remove the
300. to Y2F Error code display 4 digits in BCD QY10 Y20 to Y2F D14 D15 Near zero point setting D34 Input signal error detection flag D35 Warning output flag 167 D36 MO M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M12 M40 168 Device Function Zero point adjustment completion flag Operating condition setting command Gross weight output conversion in processing Near zero point Outside the zero point range Weighing capacity over Input signal error detection Gross weight upper limit Gross weight lower limit Stable status output Center zero point output Conversion over Simultaneous request interlock 4 Program example using intelligent function module parameters a Parameter setting Set the initial settings to parameters DO Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Module Name gt Parameter S 0000 Q61LD Parameter aj Display Filter Display All v Item Basic setting Conversion enable disable setting Averaging processing method setting Count average setting Moving average setting Set the conversion system O Enable 5 Combination Use of Count Average and Moving Average 10 Times 16 Times Stable status range setting 2 Stable status time setting 10 x100ms Zero tracking range setting 2 Zero tracking time setting 100 x100ms Stop conversion over automatic restoration setting Usable later than product information 0 Auto Stop 1201 10000000000 C
301. tput value Based on the load cell rated output analog input and two point calibration the gross weight output value can be calculated by the following equation Gross weight output value mV Analog input mV Fixed tare weight mV The analog input load cell output mV V refers to the load cell output analog input mV when 1 V is applied to the load cell Because the load cell voltage supplied from the Q61LD is 5 V the following equation is satisfied Analog input mV Load cell output mV V x 5 V Also the load cell rated output mV V is the load cell output level when the load cell is loaded by the load cell rated capacity kg Multiple load cells connected in parallel can be regarded as a single load cell of which rated capacity is n times the capacity of each cell where n is the number of identical load cells connected in parallel l Weight value kg Analog input mV tout MNN x 5 V Load cell Number of load cells p rated capacity kg in connection 3 mV V Two point span calibration value D 2 gt O oa O O 0 49 pa D O O O l Maximum weighing capacity setting value kg Gross weight output value kg A D conversion value uoouny UOI eIgIeD JUIOd OM gp an ea indino y i m ssop jo uonejnojey Egy Tare kg Two point zero calibration value O mV V l 15 mV Analog input value load cell output value mV 13 4 8 4 When calibration is per
302. tting Un G56 Un G57 Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b1 will be set to Weighing capacity over 1 However the conversion of Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 and Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 will continue Gross weight output value Maximum weighing Le NE Un G100 Un G101 gt capacity setting Minimum division x 9 1 Set Minimum division Un G58 in the Scale Initial Setting window 91 b Clearing the weighing capacity over Ex 1 When Weighing capacity over 1 occurs in the normal mode while Conversion over automatic restoration setting Usable later than product is set to 0 Auto Stop After returning Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 to a normal value turn on and off Error clear request YF When the weighing capacity over is cleared the following status will result e Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b1 is reset to Normal 0 e Input signal error detection signal XC turns off e The ALM LED turns off Ex 2 When Weighing capacity over 1 occurs in the normal mode while Conversion over automatic restoration setting Usable later than product is set to 1 Auto Restoration After returning Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 to a normal value the following status will result e Input signal error detection flag Un G114 b1 is reset to Normal 0 e Input signal error detection signal XC turns off e The ALM LED turns off
303. two point NO span calibration YES Place the actual load counter weight that has been set to Standard weight setting on the weigh scale and perform two point span calibration Page 68 Section 4 8 2 5 Move the scale Set the installation site 2 L gt Page 57 Section 4 7 3 62 4 2 3 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION When executing the two point span calibration set in advance the weight of the actual load standard weight to be placed If the installation site of the weighing machine is different from the calibration site set it again at the installation site For details on the gravitational acceleration correction function refer to the following e Gravitational Acceleration Correction Function lt Page 56 Section 4 7 This procedure is used after any backup data of the two point calibration value is reflected to the system or when any fine adjustment is required after two point calibration has been done once 63 poyjau Bumes z 8 p UOHOUN UOHEIQIED Jujod O0ML gy 3 Scale Initial Setting Configure the system according to the specifications of the weighing machine Use the Scale Initial Setting window for the setting 1 Select the module to be used and click the Module Selection Q61LD Two Point Calibration Setting X Module Selection Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Start WY Address Module Type 0000 M61LD Analog Module gt
304. umber The function version and the serial number of the Q61LD can be checked at the following e Rating plate e Front of the module e System monitor of the programming tool 1 Checking on the rating plate The rating plate is located on the side of the Q61LD MELSEC G MITSUBISHI MODEL Function version SERIAL 11031 0000000000 0 i Relevant regulation A a standards a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN 2 Checking on the front of the module The serial number and function version same as the ones on the rating plate are shown on the bottom front of the module A gt A AS jco Silasla es S S oloo soon Seo mo A OY Z PAS 110310000000000 Cc t Serial No Function version l ne ES 22 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 Checking on the System monitor o Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt Product Information List button Product Information List Sort t Order by Installation Order by Type Name Ia Master Address PLE Intelli Q 16Point 0000 12011 0000000000 T Base Slot Type Series Model Mame Paint Serial Mo Ver Production Mumber Create ESY File a Production number display Note that will be displayed for the Q61LD since the module is not featured with production number display Point The serial number to be displayed on the Product Information List window m
305. urrence 7BB 1979 Data structure is the same as History 1 Md x el 1980 History 37 Error code Error occurrence 7COn 1984 Data structure is the same as History 1 cone 1985 History 38 Error code Error occurrence 7C5y 1989 Data structure is the same as History 1 TSON 1990 History 39 Error code Error occurrence 7CAyy 1994 Data structure is the same as History 1 D w CBH 1995 History 40 Error code Error occurrence S 4 7CF y 1999 Data structure is the same as History 1 3 A Pr indicates setting data and Md indicates monitor data 2 Indicates whether reading from and writing to a sequence program are enabled D R Reading enabled W Writing enabled 3 Data must be written to the buffer memory under the following interlock condition buffer memory write conditions of I O signals e Operating condition setting Buffer memory write condition Y9 X9 UN A tN A mov HO GO Write _ Operating Operating request Condition condition setting setting request completion flag MW RW US a RAR NR UR A RSS e Two point setting Buffer memory write condition rw X7 UN E a LS Ho G40 Write Two point Two point request setting setting request completion flag _ 125 6 2 Setting Data Details This section describes the buffer memory of the Q61LD in detail For details on the functions that use this buffer memory refer to the following FUNCTION lt _ gt Page 34 CHAPTER 4 1 Conver
306. ut signal X8 and Input signal error detection signal XC operate 106 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 4 18 Default Setting Registration Function This function changes the set value in the buffer memory back to default values Simultaneously zero reset is performed and the correction made on the Zero point by zero point adjustment is cleared to 0 For buffer memory areas whose values are to be changed back to the default refer to the following e List of Buffer Memory Addresses gt Page 118 Section 6 1 This function is available in the two point calibration mode and cannot be used in the normal mode For details on zero reset refer to the following e Zero Set Reset Function lt Page 89 Section 4 11 uoy9un y uoejsibay Bulnes nejed 8L y 107 1 Setting method 1 Select the module to be used and click the Module Selection Q61LD Default Setting Module Selection Tool gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt o000 M61LD Analog Module gt Q61LD Default Setting 2 Click the button MELSOFT Series GX Works The Following area of the module will be set back to default Initial setting value Calibration control setting Flag Two poink setting value Two point calibration value Are vou sure to execute it 3 The default setting is completed Point O Once the default setting registration has been performed the previous setting values cannot be restored O After the
307. ut when the gross weight output value falls outside the setting range is an upper limit warning or a lower limit warning can be confirmed b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO limit value Upper limit value D O Data for b2 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Normal 1 Alarm on a Status of Warning output flag Un G115 e When a gross weight output value falls outside the ranges set in Gross weight lower lower limit value setting L Un G24 to Gross weight upper upper limit value setting H Un G31 this flag turns to Alarm ON 1 e When a warning is detected Warning output signal X8 also turns on b Clearing of Warning output flag Un G115 When a gross weight output value falls within the setting range the flag is automatically cleared 42 Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 The status of two point calibration can be checked b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 bS b4 b3 b2 b1 bO 0 Off 1 Two point zero calibration completion 0 Off 1 Two point span calibration completion Data for b2 to b7 are fixed to 0 Data for b9 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Off 1 Two point span calibration abnormal completion e When a two point zero calibration is completed Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 bO turns to Two point zero calibration completion 1 e When a two point span calibration is completed Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 b1 turns
308. utput is 1mV V However it is normally unnecessary to be aware of the applied voltage The example assumes the following load cell specifications e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 1000kg e Load cell rated output Un G52 3 0mV V e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 1 e Applied voltage As in the figure below Output voltage mV 36 mV When 12V is applied 15 mV When 5V is applied Q61LD applied voltage 9 mV NS 0 mV 0 mV V 3 mV V rated output When 3V is applied 34 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION 2 Rated capacity and rated output When a load is applied on the load cell the output voltage proportional to the load weight will be obtained and when the load corresponds to the rated capacity is applied the rated output will be obtained The example assumes the following load cell specifications e Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 1000kg e Load cell rated output Un G52 As in the figure below e Number of load cells in connection Un G53 1 e Applied voltage 5V Output mV V 3 mV V Load cell rated output 3mV V ene Load cell rated output 2mV V 1 mV V Load cell rated output 1mV V 0 mV V 0 kg 1000 kg Rated capacity Load kg 30 S 9D peo JO S9NSIJSJOBIJBYO JeJauao y 36 3 Parallel connection of load cells By connecting a number of identical load cells in parallel the resulting load cell system may be regarded as a single load cell
309. utput value H Un G107 When conversion starts by turning on and off Operating condition setting request Y9 the new maximum and minimum values are stored 1 Setting details No setting is required because the maximum and minimum values are automatically stored in the areas from Maximum gross weight output value L Un G104 to Minimum gross weight output value H Un G107 Point As the data of Maximum gross weight output value L Un G104 to Minimum gross weight output value H Un G107 can be rewritten through a sequence program the maximum and minimum values within a specific period can be checked 4 17 Output Value Hold Function This function temporarily holds output values When Output value hold request Y3 is turned on the output value will be held However when the CPU module key switch is moved to STOP position or an error occurs Output value hold request Y3 is turned off 1 Output values to be held When Output value hold request Y3 is turned on the following output values will not be updated even if the load cell output is changed e Gross weight output value Un G100 Un G101 e Digital output value Un G102 Un G103 e Maximum gross weight output value L Un G104 to Minimum gross weight output value H Un G107 e Maximum digital output value L Un G108 to Minimum digital output value H Un G111 Point Even while the output data is held the internal processing continues Warning outp
310. vailable the following data must be recorded before changing a module and the recorded data must be set to the buffer memory after the change Save Restoration Setting List lt gt Page 222 Section 10 9 195 10 4 Procedures of Online Module Change Online module change is performed by operating a GX Works2 connected to a remote I O module This section describes respective procedure for the cases when parameters are set from GX Works2 and when parameters are set by a sequence program Parameter setting Another system Reference Available Page 198 Section 10 5 Unavailable Page 210 Section 10 7 Available Page 204 Section 10 6 Unavailable Page 216 Section 10 8 Configuration function Sequence program 1 System configuration The following system configuration is used to explain the procedure of online module charge Remote master station Station No 0 Remote I O station Station No 1 QJ71LP21 25 X Y00 to X Y1F QJ72LP25 25 Q61LD X Y1000 to X Y100F A a po PUT EEEH H HHHH GX Works2 Network No 1 196 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 2 Procedures The procedure of online module change is shown below Stop the operation Remove the module Mount a new module Check the operation Restart the control aBueyd sjnpoyy auuo JO S INp 20Id Y O 197 10 5 When Parameters are Set by the C
311. value 1 I supply rte erat ee DIAN 1 Un G100 Un G101 if i Fi i o re y i l l X lt 1 I I 1 l l 3 N D4 D5 S 3 j UL Gross weight output value er eae S r D2 D3 Net weight value i DO D1 y i D2 D3 Gross weight output vaig DO t Measurement i i start weight D14 D15 A 1 4 l l Near zero point setting gt S I l M2 Near zero point lOFF i i I X10 ION 2 Measurement start command OFF M10 Measurement process start M15 3 Output of large quantity in supply 1 i 1 1 1 I 1 I I 1 1 1 1 1 1 l 1 1 1 1 1 M16 l io are supplied i Output of small quantity at high speed supply 1 l 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l eak are supplied M17 l at low speed Measurement completion OFF M20 ON Measurement normal completion OER M21 Overweight measurement error M22 Underweight measurement error O4JUOD JUNOWY JUB SUO JO ajdwex3 welbBolg y 6 OFF OFF M25 Measurement process completion La X11 Discharge start command OFF i i M30 ON Discharge process start OFF T1 Discharge process end OFF 187 No 1 9 188 Computer zero point check Tare zero weight storage Output of large quantity supply Output of small quantity supply Waiting for measurement completion and stabilization Measurement completion M
312. value L S 41 Two point span calibration value H System S 42 System area S 85 4 Setting is unnecessary If setting is configured the data will not be read properly 3 Function This function reads the following data from the Q61LD into the CPU module For the buffer memory areas whose data are to be read refer to the following e Dedicated instruction list lt Page 240 Appendix 1 1 There are two types of interlock signals for the G P OGLOAD instruction completion device and completion status indication device D 1 a Completion device This device turns on at the END processing in the scan where the G P OGLOAD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Completion status indication device This device turns on and off depending on the completion status of the G P OGLOAD instruction e Normal completion Remains off and does not change e Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing in the scan where the G P OGLOAD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing END END END END processing processing processing processing Sequence Program emm m 2 Execution completion of ON the G P OGLOAD instruction G P OGLOAD OFF instruction y OFF M OFF Execution succeeded y Completion status OFF Oo 3 indication device D 1 1 scan Completion device D 4 Error
313. value setting H Un G31 is ignored O Seta value outside the setting range or under the following condition lower lower limit value lt lower upper limit value lt upper lower limit value lt upper upper limit value lt maximum weighing capacity setting value If the value that has been set fails to satisfy the conditions the following status results e An error code is stored in Latest error code Un G190 e Error flag XF turns on e Conversion is performed with the settings before error occurrence 12 Two point setting Un G40 This setting is used to specify whether to read or write data required for two point calibration from or to the buffer memory b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 o lo olololololololo ololo oloTo _ Se oe Data for b1 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Read 1 Write a Enabling the settings Turn on and off Two point calibration mode switch request YA b Default Read 0 is set by default 132 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 13 Two point calibration method setting Un G41 Select automatic setting or user setting to configure the settings for two point calibration values When two point calibration processing is performed with automatic setting selected optimum calibration values are stored automatically When performing two point calibration processing with user setting selected set a value using a Sequence program b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1
314. weighing capacity over outside the zero point range or conversion over OFF Normal operation Used for connecting load cells and other wiring Displays the serial number of the Q61LD 1 When the module is installed in a MELSECNET H Remote I O station the RUN LED remains off until the data link starts to function normally even after the module is powered on Once the data link is established the RUN LED will turn on 155 7 4 Wiring This section describes wiring precautions and examples of module connection 7 4 1 Wiring precautions To make full use of the capabilities of the Q61LD and to realize a highly reliable system the external wiring must be less susceptible to noise The precautions for external wiring are listed below e Separate the load cell cables from main circuit lines or other AC control cables by at least 100mm Keep a sufficient distance from high voltage lines or any circuit with harmonic components such as a main inverter load circuit Otherwise the load cell lines may be susceptible to noise surge or induction Use shielded cables to connect load cells Separate the load cell lines from AC lines and other noisy lines such as for electric power devices and digital devices Use separate cables for AC control circuits and external input signals of the Q61LD to avoid any influence of AC surges or induction Solderless terminals with insulation sleeve cannot be used for terminal blocks It is recommended to
315. wo point zero calibration completion M52 Two point calibration value read in process flag 258 APPENDICES 4 Program example automatic setting a Two point setting and two point calibration X7 Y7 x9 Y9 U0 G43 0U0 G43 1 U0 G148 0 HA M40 Simultaneous request interlock M40 XO X13 a HAN SET M50 Two point calibration start flag XOA X14 EM RST M50 M50 P YOA Two point calibration mode switch request ON XOA L i SET MO Operating condition setting command MO XOF M40 VO HA MOV HO GO Conversion enable SET Y9 Operating condition setting request ON RST M0 Operating condition setting command X0A Y9 x9 7 Hg yA YAA a Y9 Operating condition setting request OFF X15 XO X0A XOF M40 UN l I PH DMOV K3000 G50 Load cell rated capacity UN MOV K20 G52 Load cell rated output UN l l MOV K3 G53 Number of load cells in connection UO o l MOV KO G54 Weighing platform weight ie zero offset Used DMOV K3000 G56 Maximum weighing capacity setting UN MOV KO G58 Minimum division UN mgt MOV KI G59 Decimal point position gt gt UN l 33 MOV K1 G60 Unit O J J VO l l ag DMOV K3000 G62 Standard weight setting e e UN E a i N DMOV K98067 G64 Installation site gravitational acceleration v 0 vn ee mm S Y DMOV K98067 G66 Calibration site gravitational acceleration a UN oO MOV H1 G40 Two point setting Write x O 33 UN ss Sw MOV HO G41 Two point calibration method setting aS Automatic setting
316. ws the connection example of the 6 wire type Q61LD Summing box Connection cable Internal a circuit N N AA 2 4 wire type connection mg Although the analog input load cell output interface of the Q61LD is designed for the 6 wire type it is also 5 compatible with 4 wire type connection by connecting EXC to S and EXC to S z The following figure shows the connection example of the 4 wire type Summing box Connection cable Q61LD Internal circuit Shield Shield Point When the 4 wire type is used for connecting the Q61LD to the load cell connect EXC to S and EXC to S and never leave the S and S terminals open circuit If the terminals are left open circuit an excessive voltage may be applied to the load cell to cause over heating or damage of the load cell 157 3 Parallel connection of load cells By connecting multiple load cells to the Q61LD in parallel a hopper scale system or track scale system can be implemented The following figure shows the example of parallel connection Summing box OUT a q 7 J T E y HH wo Na EA X V 1 N J af Se soon 4 LK OTE soe Sen Baran Shield Q61LD Connection cable Internal circuit 4 The averaging resistors R must have the resistance value of 300 to 500Q with an excellent temperature coefficient e g the ppm C value must not be better than that of the module perform
317. xer Removes any material attached from the scale hopper by using the knocker or vibrator if necessary Q61LD I O module EHS Valve Load cell 7 f Load cell i Summing box Connection cable Knocker Vibrator l Discharging valve C1L9O ay SN o wajs s onuog Z Mixer 17 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter describes the system configuration of the Q61LD 2 1 Applicable Systems This section describes the applicable systems 1 Applicable modules the number of mountable modules and applicable base units a When mounted with a CPU module The following table shows the CPU modules applicable to the Q61LD the number of mountable modules and applicable base units Depending on the combination with other mounted modules and the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may become insufficient Pay attention to the power supply capacity before mounting modules If the power supply capacity is insufficient review the combination of the modules Applicable CPU module Number of Applicable base unit 2 mountable Extension base 4 Main base unit modules unit QOO0JCPU Up to 16 QOOCPU Up to 24 Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Up to 64 Q12HCPU Q25HCPU CPU type CPU model Basic model QCPU High performance model QCPU P
318. y souanbas e usym uone qijeo juod om y xipueddy 253 1 Two point zero calibration Perform two point zero calibration with nothing placed Okg on the weighing machine 1 Configure the following settings e Set Two point calibration method setting Un G41 to Automatic setting 0 default e Set Two point calibration setting Un G42 b0 to Two point zero calibration enable 1 e Set Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 to Two point zero calibration requested 1 2 The settings above clear the correction made by the zero point adjustment and zero tracking to 0 and the optimum values are automatically stored in the following buffer memory areas Instrumentation amplifier gain setting Un G80 e A D converter gain setting Un G81 e Tare zero offset output value Un G82 Un G83 e Two point zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 3 When calibration is completed Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 b0 turns to Two point zero calibration completion 1 After completion set Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 back to Two point zero calibration not requested 0 When a two point zero calibration is completed abnormally Two point calibration completion flag Un G143 b8 also turns to Two point calibration failed 1 Remove error causes and set Two point calibration request Un G43 b0 to Two point zero calibration requested 1 again For details on the error causes refer to the following e TROUBLE
319. zero calibration value Un G84 Un G85 failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi representative e Two point span calibration value Un G86 Un G87 Otherwise two point calibration is performed with the setting of Conversion enable disable setting Un GO set to Conversion disable 1 The G P OGSTOR instruction is executed in the two point Do not execute the G P OGSTOR instruction in calibration mode the two point calibration mode l l KE Execute the G P OGSTOR instruction only once 162 Minor The G P OGSTOR instruction is executed consecutively for one module The G P OGSTOR instruction is executed for a model that Execute G P OGSTOR instruction for the same differs from the one for which the G P OGLOAD instruction model 161 Minor 163 Minor was executed 228 b Errors related to the channel If the following errors occur the error codes are written to Latest error code Un G190 Error code decimal 1100 1110 Minor 1111 Minor i n S o dl 7 Description The value set in Load cell rated capacity Un G50 Un G51 is outside the range of 1 to 999999 The value set in Load cell rated output Un G52 is outside the range of 3 to 30 The value set in Number of load cells in connection Un G53 is outside the range of 1 to 4 The value set in Tare zero offset Un G54 is other than 0 and The value set in Maximum weighing capacity setting Un G56 Un G57 is outside the range of 1

Load Cell Input Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents